Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are...

156
1475/1875 Variable Chamber Round Balers OPERATOR’S MANUAL Form No. 907520 Replaces 907143

Transcript of Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are...

Page 1: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

1475/1875Variable Chamber

Round Balers

OPERATOR’S MANUAL

Form No.907520Replaces907143

Page 2: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

GEHL

NEW AGRICULTURAL EQUIPMENT

ROUND BALER

WARRANTY

GEHL AGRICULTURE DIVISION of the GEHL COMPANY, hereinafter referred to as Gehl,warrants new Gehl Round Balers and attachments, to the Original Retail Purchaser to be freefrom defects in material and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months {ninety (90) daysfor commercial/custom use} from the Warranty Start Date.

GEHL AGRICULTURE WARRANTY INCLUDES:Genuine Gehl parts and labor costs required to repair or replace equipment at the sellingdealer’s business location.

GEHL MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED (INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE), EXCEPT ASEXPRESSLY STATED IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT.

GEHL WARRANTY DOES NOT INCLUDE:1. Transportation to selling dealer’s business location or, at the option of the Original Retail Purchaser,

the cost of a service call.

2. Used equipment.

3. Components covered by their own non-Gehl warranties, such as tires, trade accessories andengines.

4. Normal maintenance service and expendable, high wear items.

5. Repairs or adjustments caused by: improper use; non-intended use; failure to follow recommendedmaintenance procedures; use of unauthorized attachments; accident or other casualty.

6. Liability for incidental or consequential damages of any type, including, but not limited to lost profitsor expenses of acquiring replacement equipment.

No agent, employee or representative of Gehl has any authority to bind Gehl to any warranty except asspecifically set forth herein. Any of these limitations excluded by local law shall be deemed deleted from thiswarranty; all other terms will continue to apply.

Page 3: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 1 907520/CP0600

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Warranty Inside Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 1Introduction 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2Specifications 3–5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Bale Control 4. . . . . . . . . . Automatic Twine Wrap Control 5. . . .

Chapter 3Checklists 7–9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4Safety 10-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick Wrap 18–19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5Controls & Safety Equipment 20-27. . . . .

Automatic Bale Control 25. . . . . . . . . Automatic Twine Control 26. . . . . . . . Manual Twine Control 26. . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6Operation 28-56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Manual Twine Control 35. . . . . . . . . . Automatic Twine Control 35. . . . . . . . Automatic Bale Control 40. . . . . . . . . Quick Wrap 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7Adjustments 57-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic Twine Control 66. . . . . . . . Automatic Bale Control 69. . . . . . . . . Quick Wrap 73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 8Lubrication 77-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick Wrap 78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9Service 82-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick Wrap 94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 10Preparing for Field Operation 96-100. . . .

Chapter 11

Transporting 101-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 12Storage 103. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 13

Troubleshooting 104-127. . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Twine Control 111. . . . . . . . Automatic Bale Control 113. . . . . . . . . Quick Wrap 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 14Set-up & Assembly 128-137. . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 15

Optional Features & Accessories 138-140

Chapter 16Decal Locations 141-146. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Quick Wrap 146. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 17Maintenance Log 147-149. . . . . . . . . . . . .

Index 150-152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard HardwareTorque Data Inside Back Cover. . . . . . . . .

Page 4: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 2 Printed in U.S.A.

CHAPTER 1INTRODUCTION

Your decision to purchase this piece of GEHL equip-ment was a good one. We are sure that your decision wasstrongly considered and that you are looking forward tomany seasons of reliable performance from this ma-chine.

We, as a Company, have invested a great deal of timeand effort in developing our lines of equipment. Theequipment you have purchased is built with a great dealof pride and designed to give you long life, efficientoperation, durability and dependability.

This manual was developed specifically for the machineyou have purchased. The information within is for yourassistance in preparing, adjusting, maintaining andservicing your machine. More importantly, this manualprovides an operating plan for safe and proper use ofyour machine. Major points of safe operation aredetailed in the SAFETY chapter of this manual. Referto the Table of Contents for an outline (by chapters) ofthis manual. Use the Index, located at the back of thismanual, for specific chapter and topic/page numberreferences.

This GEHL equipment is provided with a Pocket on theinside of the Right Twinebox for storing the Operator’sManual. After using it, please return the Manual to thePocket and keep it with the unit at all times! Further-more, we recommend that if this machine is re-sold, thisManual accompany the unit.

Modern machinery has become more sophisti-cated and, with that in mind, Gehl Companyasks that you read and understand the con-tents of this manual COMPLETELY and be-come familiar with your new machine, BEFOREattempting to operate it.

The Gehl dealer organization stands ready to provideyou with any assistance you may require and carriesgenuine Gehl service parts. All parts should be obtainedfrom or ordered through your Gehl Dealer. Givecomplete information about the part and include themodel and serial numbers of your machine. Record theserial number in the space provided on the pictorial, asa handy record for quick reference.

The model number and serial number for the Baler is ona decal located under the Top Channel, near the CenterColumn of the Right Frame Assembly. If equipped withthe Quick Wrap, the Quick Wrap model and serial

COMPANY

W E S T B E N D , W I 5 3 0 9 5 U S A

Typical Model & Serial Number Plates

RB M O D E L N O .

S E R I A L N O .

(Fill In)

(Fill In)

COMPANY

W E S T B E N D , W I 5 3 0 9 5 U S A

QW M O D E L N O .

S E R I A L N O .

(Fill In)

(Fill In)

number is on a decal located on the Left Panel Assemblybehind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ aredetermined from a position standing at the rear of theunit facing the direction of travel. From this position, theBaler Drive Sprocket on the Transmission Output Shaftis on the left side.

Gehl Company reserves the right to make changes orimprovements in the design or construction of any partwithout incurring the obligation to install such changeson any unit previously delivered.

Standard hardware torques appear in a chart at the endof the manual.

Throughout this manual, information is provided whichis set in italic type and introduced by the word NOTEor IMPORTANT. BE SURE to read carefully andcomply with the message or directive given. Followingthis information will improve your operating or mainte-nance efficiency, help you avoid costly breakdowns orunnecessary damage and extend your machine’s life.

The Gehl Company, in cooperation with theAmerican Society of Agricultural Engineersand the Society of Automotive Engineers,has adopted this SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL

to pinpoint characteristics which, if not proper-ly followed, can create a safety hazard. Whenyou see this symbol in this manual or on theunit itself, you are reminded to BE ALERT! Yourpersonal safety is involved.

Page 5: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 3 907520/CP0600

CHAPTER 2SPECIFICATIONS

All Dimensions are in Inches (Millimeters) Unless Otherwise Noted

Baler Specifications

Model & Description RB1475 and RB1875. . . . . . . . Round Balers

Power From PTO and Electric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Hydraulic Circuit of 540 RPM tractor

with Minimum power of 50 hp (37 kW)(for 1475)or 60 hp (45 kW)(for 1875)

Height:

1475 97 (2664). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 109 (2769). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Length:

1475 147 (3734). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 157 (3988). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Width:

1475 80 (2032). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 96 (2438). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Pickup Width:

1475 56 (1422). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 72 (1829). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Weight (Approximate):

1475 4180 lb (1900 kg). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 5220 lb (2373 kg). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Drawbar Tongue Weight (Approximate):

1475 850 lb (386 kg). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 1050 lb (477 kg). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bale Diameter (Full Size):

1475 60 (1524). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 72 (1829). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bale Weight (Nominal):

1475 900 lb (408 kg). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 1800 lb (816 kg). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bale Width;

1475 45 (1143). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 61 (1549). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tires:

1475 11L x 14, 6-ply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1875 31 x 13.5, 6-ply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Standard Features (Common to both Balers):

Four-Bar Closed-Reel Pickup with Crowder Shields

Infinitely Adjustable Pickup Height

Hydraulically Operated Rear Gate

Hydraulic Valve Gate Cylinder Lock

Constant Velocity Drive Line with Shear BoltOverload Protection and Overrunning Clutch

Two 3-Ball Twineboxes (6 Ball Total Capacity)

Dual Twine Wrapping Mechanism with ElectricActuator Control

Visual Bale Size Indicator (Manual Control ModelsOnly)

Self-contained Hydraulic Total Density ControlSystem

Bale Discharge Ramps with Adjustable Incline

Textured (One side) Belts

Adjustable Shuttle Stops

Crop Hold-down for Pickup

Fenders

Bale Counter (Manual Control Models Only)

Transport Lights

Optional Features & Accessories(Customer Selected):

Automatic Bale Control System

Automatic Twine Wrap System

Manual Twine Wrap System

Quick Wrap Bale Wrap System

Crowder Wheel Kit

Packing Roller Lagging Kit

Chain Oiler Kit

Pickup Hydraulic Lift Kit

1000 RPM Conversion Kit

Safety Chain

Service Accessories

Belt Dutchman

Shear Bolts (8-pack)

Belt Re-lacing Kit

Belt Lacing Kit

Net Stripper Kit

Various Connector Repair Kits

Twine Sensor Jumper Kit

2 Magnet Twine Wheels

Page 6: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 2 – Specifications

907520/CP0600 4 Printed in U.S.A.

Automatic Bale Control SpecificationsDescription Automatic Bale Control System. . . . . . . Power Requirements 12 to 14 Volts D.C.. . . . . . . . . . Circuit Protection 20 Amp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Temperature Range –5°F to 160°F. . . . .

(–20°C to 70°C)

Storage Temperature Range –40°F to 185°F. . . . . . . .

(–40°C to 85°C)3 Digit LED Back–Lit Liquid Crystal Display 0.34″ (8.6 mm) High Display

1 – Liquid Crystal Display (LED Back–Lit)2 – Bale Size (Growth) Bar Graph3 – Change Bale Size Mode Icon4 – Change Number of Wraps Icon5 – Pushbutton Keypads6 – Bale Counter/Error Message/Baler Code

Alpha-Numeric Display7 – Go Arrow Icon8 – Tailgate Position Icon9 – Cycle Icon

10 – Netting Mode Selection Icon11 – Twine Model Selection Icon12 – Manual Mode Selection Icon13 – Auto Mode Selection Icon

Fig. 1: Component Identifications

1

2

5

3

4

6

7

8

9

10111213

Page 7: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 2 – Specifications

Printed in U.S.A. 5 907520/CP0600

Automatic Twine Wrap Control SpecificationsDecsription Automatic Twine Wrap System. . . . . . . . Power Requirements 10.5 – 15 Volts D.C.. . . . . . . . . Operating Temperature Range 15° F to 160° F. . . . . .

(-10° C to 70° C)

Storage Temperature Range -40° F to 185° F. . . . . . . (-40° C to 85° C)

1 – Mode Switch (AUTO/MANUAL)2 – Manual Mode Actuator Switch

(EXTEND/NEUTRAL/RETRACT)3 – POWER Switch (ON/OFF)4 – Channel 5 Symbol – Twine Arm Position5 – Channel 4 Symbol – Twine Arm Pause6 – INCREASE Key7 – Channel 3 Symbol – Twine End Wraps8 – DECREASE Key

Fig. 2: Auto-Twine Wrap Control Module Component Locations

9 – Harness Connector10 – Channel 2 Symbol – Twine Density

(No. of Wraps Across Bale)11 – Channel 1 Symbol – Bale Count12 – Tailgate Status Symbol (Closed)13 – Tailgate Status Symbol (Open)14 – Digital Display15 – SELECT Key (Channel Control)

1

3

2

678

10

9 5 4

11

13

12

15

14

Page 8: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 2 – Specifications

907520/CP0600 6 Printed in U.S.A.

Notes

Page 9: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 7 907520/CP0600

CHAPTER 3CHECKLISTS

PRE-DELIVERYAfter the Baler has been completely set up, thefollowing inspections MUST be made before deliveringit to the Customer. Check off each item after prescribedaction is taken.

Check that:

� NO parts of the unit have been damaged in shipment.Check for such things as dents and loose or missing parts;correct or replace components as required.

� All Grease Fittings have been properly lubricated and theGearbox is filled to the proper level; see Lubrication chap-ter of this manual.

� All Guards, Shields and Decals are in place and securelyattached.

� All fasteners and Wheel Lug Nuts are properly secured.

� All Adjustments are made to comply with settings givenin the Adjustments chapter of this manual.

� Model and Serial Numbers for the Baler and Quick Wrap(if so equipped) are recorded in the spaces provided onthis page and page 2.

The following items are furnished attached to the Baleror in the Baler Twinebox:

� Bale Ramps & Mounting Hardware; Reversing Wrench;Hitchjack,; (4) Drive Line Shear Bolts; Hitch Pin andWashers, Nut and Hairpin Cotterpin; 72″ Belt LacingCable; Operator’s Manual; Baler Control Box & Cable;Front PTO half; Hose & Cable Support.

Hook the Baler onto the appropriate RPMtractor and test run the unit while checkingthat proper operation is exhibited by allcomponents.

Check that:

� The Telescoping PTO Drive turns freely inside the DriveShield Tubes.

� Hydraulic Hoses and all connections do NOT leak underpressure.

� Tailgate opens and closes without binding.

� Drives, Rollers and Belts are rotating smoothly and oper-ating properly and Belts are tracking properly.

� TDC Reservoir pressure is at least 150 PSI (1050 kPa) andReservoir oil is at proper fill level.

I acknowledge that the pre-delivery procedures wereperformed on this unit as outlined.

Dealership’s Name

Dealer Representative’s Name

Date Checklist Filled out

Baler Model Number Serial Number

Quick Wrap Model Number Serial Number

DELIVERYThe following Checklist is an important reminder ofvaluable information that MUST be passed on to theCustomer at the time the unit is delivered. Check offeach item as you explain it to the Customer.

� Give the Customer his Operator’s Manual. Instruct him tobe sure to read and completely understand its contentsBEFORE operating the unit.

� Direct the Customer on how to use the Index of this manu-al as a quick page number locating guide.

� Explain and review with the Customer the Safety andControls & Safety Equipment chapters of this manual.

� Explain that regular lubrication is required for continuedproper operation and long life. Review with him the Lu-brication chapter of this manual.

� Explain and review the Service chapter of this manualwith the customer.

� Explain and review with the customer the bale tying and/or wrapping system that the Baler is equipped with.

� Explain the function and adjustment of the Total DensityControl (TDC) system.

� Demonstrate the proper use of the spring-loaded PTOLocking Device, Shuttle Locks, Rear Gate CylinderLocks, Reversing Wrench and Hitchjack.

� Explain and review both the Operation and Preparing forField Operation chapters of this manual.

� Completely fill out the Owner’s Registration, includingCustomer’s signature, and return it to the Gehl Company.

I acknowledge that the above points were reviewed withme at the time of delivery.

Customer’s Signature

Date Delivered

(Dealer’s File Copy)

Rem

ove

Dea

ler’

s F

ile C

op

y at

Per

fora

tio

n

Page 10: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 8 Printed in U.S.A.

INTENTIONALLY BLANK(To be removed as Dealer’s File Copy)

Page 11: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 9 907520/CP0600

CHAPTER 3CHECKLISTS

PRE-DELIVERYAfter the Baler has been completely set up, thefollowing inspections MUST be made before deliveringit to the Customer. Check off each item after prescribedaction is taken.

Check that:

� NO parts of the unit have been damaged in shipment.Check for such things as dents and loose or missing parts;correct or replace components as required.

� All Grease Fittings have been properly lubricated and theGearbox is filled to the proper level; see Lubrication chap-ter of this manual.

� All Guards, Shields and Decals are in place and securelyattached.

� All fasteners and Wheel Lug Nuts are properly secured.

� All Adjustments are made to comply with settings givenin the Adjustments chapter of this manual.

� Model and Serial Numbers for the Baler and Quick Wrap(if so equipped) are recorded in the spaces provided onthis page and page 2.

The following items are furnished attached to the Baleror in the Baler Twinebox:

� Bale Ramps & Mounting Hardware; Reversing Wrench;Hitchjack,; (4) Drive Line Shear Bolts; Hitch Pin andWashers, Nut and Hairpin Cotterpin; 72″ Belt LacingCable; Operator’s Manual; Baler Control Box & Cable;Front PTO half; Hose & Cable Support.

Hook the Baler onto the appropriate RPMtractor and test run the unit while checkingthat proper operation is exhibited by allcomponents.

Check that:

� The Telescoping PTO Drive turns freely inside the DriveShield Tubes.

� Hydraulic Hoses and all connections do NOT leak underpressure.

� Tailgate opens and closes without binding.

� Drives, Rollers and Belts are rotating smoothly and oper-ating properly and Belts are tracking properly.

� TDC Reservoir pressure is at least 150 PSI (1050 kPa) andReservoir oil is at proper fill level.

I acknowledge that the pre-delivery procedures wereperformed on this unit as outlined.

Dealership’s Name

Dealer Representative’s Name

Date Checklist Filled out

Baler Model Number Serial Number

Quick Wrap Model Number Serial Number

DELIVERYThe following Checklist is an important reminder ofvaluable information that MUST be passed on to theCustomer at the time the unit is delivered. Check offeach item as you explain it to the Customer.

� Give the Customer his Operator’s Manual. Instruct him tobe sure to read and completely understand its contentsBEFORE operating the unit.

� Direct the Customer on how to use the Index of this manu-al as a quick page number locating guide.

� Explain and review with Customer the Safety and Con-trols & Safety Equipment chapters of this manual.

� Explain that regular lubrication is required for continuedproper operation and long life. Review with him the Lu-brication chapter of this manual.

� Explain and review the Service chapter of this manualwith the customer.

� Explain and review with the customer the bale tying and/or wrapping system that the Baler is equipped with.

� Explain the function and adjustment of the Total DensityControl (TDC) system.

� Demonstrate the proper use of the spring-loaded PTOLocking Device, Shuttle Locks, Rear Gate CylinderLocks, Reversing Wrench and Hitchjack.

� Explain and review both the Operation and Preparing forField Operation chapters of this manual.

� Completely fill out the Owner’s Registration, includingCustomer’s signature, and return it to the Gehl Company.

I acknowledge that the above points were reviewed withme at the time of delivery.

Customer’s Signature

Date Delivered

(Pages 7 & 8 Have Been Removed at Perforation)

Page 12: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 10 Printed in U.S.A.

CHAPTER 4

SAFETYThe above Safety Alert Symbol means ATTENTION!BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS IN-VOLVED! It stresses an attitude of ‘‘Heads Up forSafety’’ and can be found throughout this Operator’sManual and on the machine itself.

BEFORE YOU ATTEMPT TO OPERATE THISEQUIPMENT, READ AND STUDY THE FOL-LOWING SAFETY INFORMATION. IN ADDI-TION, MAKE SURE THAT EVERY INDIVIDUALWHO OPERATES OR WORKS WITH THISEQUIPMENT, WHETHER FAMILY MEMBEROR EMPLOYEE, IS FAMILIAR WITH THESESAFETY PRECAUTIONS.

Our Company ALWAYS takes the operator and his/hersafety into consideration when designing its machineryand guards exposed moving parts for his/her protection.However, some areas can not be guarded or shielded inorder to assure proper operation. This Operator’sManual, and decals on the machine, warn of additionalhazards and should be read and observed closely.

DANGER‘‘DANGER’’ indicates an imminently hazard-ous situation which, if not avoided, will resultin death or serious injury.

WARNING‘‘WARNING’’ indicates a potentially hazard-ous situation which, if not avoided, could re-sult in death or serious injury.

CAUTION‘‘CAUTION’’ indicates a potentially hazardoussituation which, if not avoided, may result inminor or moderate injury. It may also alertagainst unsafe practices.

1. Disengage the tractor PTO.

2. Shut off the tractor engine, place the tractortransmission in park and/or lock brake ped-als to prevent any tractor movement.

3. On Auto-Electric control equipped balers,BEFORE leaving the tractor seat to performany function or maintenance, push “POW-ER” keypad to turn off power to the control.

4. Remove the starter switch key and take itwith you when leaving the tractor seat.

5. Wait for all movement to stop.

6. Remove the telescoping drive and ALL powerconnections from the tractor.

ONLY when you have taken these precautions canyou be sure it is safe to proceed. Failure to followthe above procedure could lead to death or seriousbodily injury.

MANDATORY SAFETY SHUTDOWNPROCEDUREBEFORE unclogging, cleaning, adjusting, lubri-cating or servicing the unit:

ADDITIONAL SAFETY REMINDERS

Some photographs, used in this manual, may showdoors, guards or shields open or removed for illustrationpurposes ONLY! BE SURE that all doors, guards andshields are in their proper positions and securelyattached BEFORE operating this unit!

ALWAYS wear safety glasses with side shields whenstriking metal against metal! In addition, it is recom-mended that a softer (non-chipable) material be used tocushion the blow. Failure to heed could result in seriousinjury to the eyes or other parts of the body!

NEVER use your hands to search for hydraulic fluidleaks; use a piece of cardboard. Escaping fluid underpressure can be invisible and penetrate the skin causingserious injury! If any fluid is injected into your skin, seea doctor at once! Injected fluid MUST BE surgicallyremoved by a doctor familiar with this type of injury organgrene may result.

Page 13: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 11 907520/CP0600

SAFETY(Continued)

ALWAYS follow state and local regulations regardinguse of a safety chain and transport lighting when towingfarm equipment on public highways! A safety chainshould always be used to retain the connection betweenthe towing and towed machines, in the event ofseparation of the primary attaching system! BE SUREto check with local law enforcement agencies for yourown particular regulations. Unless otherwise prohib-ited, use a Slow–moving Vehicle (SMV) emblem.

Only a safety chain (NOT an elastic or nylon/plastic towstrap) should be used to retain the connection betweenthe towing and towed machines, in the event ofseparation of the primary attaching system. Refer to theOptional Features & Accessories chapter for safetychain.

Good safety practice dictates that you NEVER tow animplement that does not have brakes, unless the towingvehicle weighs at least one-and-one half (1-1/2) timesthe weight of the towed implement and its load. For anypublic highway travel and to be in compliance with thisrule, BE SURE that your tractor is heavy enough tocounterbalance the weight of the baler and a full-sizedbale.

Limit towing speed to 20 mph (32 km/h).

Always use adequate lights or safety warnings whentransporting the machine on public roads and after dark.Check with the local law enforcement agencies forspecific requirements.

BE SURE that the telescoping PTO drive rotates freelyinside the drive shield tubes at all times. Balers are

provided with two different types of telescoping drives;one drive has metal shield tubes and the other has plasticshield tubes. The drive with plastic shield tubes must beanchored to a hole in a part of the baler frame with thetie-down chain provided. The drive with metal shieldtubes MUST NOT be anchored.

Bales made with the Round Baler are LARGE, CYLIN-DRICAL and HEAVY. Serious personal injury orproperty damage could result if the bales are notcarefully and properly handled. NEVER eject or storebales where they could possibly roll downhill.

To ensure continued safe operation, replace damaged orworn-out parts with genuine GEHL service parts,BEFORE attempting to operate this equipment.

Our Company does NOT sell replacement tires. Inaddition, tire mounting, service or inflation can bedangerous. Whenever possible, trained personnelshould be called to service and/or mount tires, followingthe tire manufacturer’s instructions. If you do not havesuch instructions, contact your tire dealer or ourCompany. In any event, to avoid possible fatal or seriousinjury, follow the specific directives given in the Servicechapter of this manual.

BE SURE to review and comply with ALL safetyrecommendations set forth in the tractor operator’smanual.

REMEMBER, it is the owner’s responsibility forcommunicating information on the safe use and propermaintenance of this machine.

Page 14: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 12 Printed in U.S.A.

SAFETY(Continued)

091444

093461

093462

Page 15: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 13 907520/CP0600

SAFETY(Continued)

119554

Page 16: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 14 Printed in U.S.A.

SAFETY(Continued)

093373

093653

093466

093465

Page 17: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 15 907520/CP0600

SAFETY(Continued)

093367

119596

Page 18: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 16 Printed in U.S.A.

SAFETY(Continued)

093458

093457

143007

UnderShield

Page 19: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 17 907520/CP0600

SAFETY(Continued)

093459

093457

Page 20: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 18 Printed in U.S.A.

SAFETY(Continued)

Quick Wrap System Models Only

093457

����

���� ����

����� ������������ �

������ ������������ �

Page 21: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 19 907520/CP0600

SAFETY(Continued)

Quick Wrap System Models Only

124982

���� ����

���� ����

��� ����

�����������������

Page 22: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 20 Printed in U.S.A.

CHAPTER 5CONTROLS & SAFETY EQUIPMENT

Each variable chamber Round Baler is provided withseveral similar features for operator safety and conve-nience.

CAUTIONBecome familiar with and know how to useALL safety devices and controls on this ma-chine BEFORE attempting to operate the unit.Know how to STOP machine operation BE-FORE starting it.

FRONT GUARD ASSEMBLY (Fig. 1)

1 – Front Guard Assembly

Fig. 1

1

WARNINGNEVER remove the front guard assemblyfrom the Baler. NEVER stand on or place yourarms or legs through the front guard barswhile the baler is running or moving. ALWAYSexercise the MANDATORY SAFETY SHUT-DOWN PROCEDURE (page 10), BEFORE ap-proaching the front guard assembly.

The Front Guard assembly serves as a barrier and areminder to KEEP AWAY from the front of the Baler,while it is running. Furthermore, do NOT attempt toplace an arm or leg between the Front Guard Bars,whilethe Baler is operating. The Front Guard assembly can beunbolted at the bottom and pivoted out of the way whennecessary. BE SURE the Front Guard assembly isrestored to its original position and secured BEFOREresuming operation.

FENDER/TWINEBOX ASSEMBLIES(Figs. 2 & 3)

WARNINGNEVER attempt to step up on, stand on or rideon the twineboxes, or any other part of the bal-er, while the baler is moving or being oper-ated.

1

1 – Operator’s Manual location on undersideof Twinebox Lid

Fig. 2: Twinebox & Fender on Right Side

The Fender/Twinebox Assemblies provide protectionfor the Tires, a place to store twine, a place to store theOperator’s Manual on the right side, and a place to standon to engage or disengage the Shuttle Locks.

Page 23: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 5 – Controls & Safety Equipment

Printed in U.S.A. 21 907520/CP0600

1 – Gate Cylinder Lockout Valve

Fig. 3: Twinebox & Fender on Left Side

1

GATE CYLINDER LOCKOUT VALVE

WARNINGALWAYS place the gate cylinder lockout valvein the locked position BEFORE working in-side the bale chamber or under the gate whenthe gate is open.

After SN24715-1475 andSN17900-1875 (Figs. 3, 4 & 5)The Baler is equipped with a Gate Cylinder LockoutValve that is used to lock and hold both Gate LiftCylinders inoperable in any position. The Lift Cylindersare locked in position when the Gate Cylinder LockoutValve Handle is turned to the vertical position (Fig.5). The Lift Cylinders are free to operate when the ValveHandle is turned to the horizontal position (Fig. 4).

1 – Gate Cylinder Lockout Valve in “Open” Position2 – Tailgate Lock Decal

Fig. 4

1 – Gate Cylinder Lockout Valve in “Locked” Posi-tion

2 – Tailgate Lock Decal

Fig. 5

Page 24: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 5 – Controls & Safety Equipment

907520/CP0600 22 Printed in U.S.A.

Before SN24716-1475 andSN17901-1875 (Figs. 3, 6 & 7)

The Baler is equipped with a Gate Cylinder LockoutValve that is used to lock and hold both Gate LiftCylinders inoperable in any position. The Lift Cylindersare locked in position when the Gate Cylinder LockoutValve Handle is depressed into the valve body and theposition Indicator is in the vertical position (Fig. 7).The Lift Cylinders are free to operate when the ValveHandle is pulled out from the valve body and the positionIndicator is pointing to the Baler and is in the notch(Fig. 6).

1 – Gate Cylinder Lockout Valve in “Open” Position2 – Indicator in Notch3 – Tailgate Lock Decal4 – Red Reflector

Fig. 6

��

SHUTTLE LOCKS (Fig. 8)

Shuttle Locks are provided on both sides of the Baler toremove Belt tension while cleaning or servicing theBaler. Engage both Locks when replacing or re-lacingthe Belts and when removing build-up from around theRollers. Step up on the left or right Twinebox in orderto reach the Shuttle Locks.

WARNINGNEVER have the PTO engaged while theshuttle locks are engaged. ALWAYS engageboth shuttle locks to make sure that belt ten-sion is completely locked out.

1 – Gate Cylinder Lockout Valve in “Locked” Posi-tion

2 – Indicator Vertical

Fig. 7

1 – Shuttle Lock Location (One Each Side)

Fig. 8: Gate in “Open” Position

1

FIRE EXTINGUISHER

WARNINGIf a fire occurs eject the bale from the baler IM-MEDIATELY, move the baler up-wind 30 feet(10 m) or more away from the ejected bale,shut off the tractor engine and proceed to putout the fire with a fire extinguisher.

Page 25: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 5 – Controls & Safety Equipment

Printed in U.S.A. 23 907520/CP0600

There is always the possibility of fire whenhandling dry forage materials. GEHL Compa-ny recommends that to limit the damage to theBaler and/or tractor in case of a bale fire, a fivegallon or larger, pressurized water type, fireextinguisher should be mounted on the trac-tor or Baler, as a minimum protection.

NOTE: A five gallon extinguisher should be suf-ficient to put out small fires that are burning the drymaterial that remains in the Baler, after the bale isejected. However, this size extinguisher is insuffi-cient to put out even a small fire in the bale.

WARNINGThe pressurized water fire extinguisher DOESNOT replace the dry chemical fire extinguish-er on the tractor (if so equipped). NEVER usea water–type fire extinguisher on electrical orfuel fires. Furthermore, to reduce the possibil-ity of a fire, keep crop build-up to a minimum,especially on the roller ends, the chain drives(behind the hinged shields) and in the pickupdrive area.

GUARDS, DOORS & SHIELDS

Whenever possible and without affecting machineoperation, Guards, Shields and/or hinged Covers havebeen used on this equipment to protect potentiallyhazardous areas. In many places, Decals are alsoprovided to warn of potential dangers as well as displayspecial operating procedures.

WARNINGRead and observe ALL Warnings on the unitBEFORE operating it. Do NOT attempt to oper-ate this equipment unless ALL factoryinstalled Guards and Shields are properly se-cured in place. BEFORE proceeding to per-form any work on the Baler and, BEFORE re-moving or opening any Shields, BE SURE toexercise the MANDATORY SAFETY SHUT-DOWN PROCEDURE (page 10). Also, BESURE to reinstall and/or close ALL ShieldsBEFORE operating the Baler.

Front Belt Guard (Fig. 9)The Front Belt Guard is provided to shield the area ofBelt travel around the Drive Roller and Idler Roller. BESURE the Guard is properly positioned and securedbefore operating the Bal-er.

1 – Front Belt Guard

Fig. 9

1

Large Hinged Guard Doors& Removable Side Shields (Fig. 10)Large Hinged Doors and Removable (hinged with Latchon later models) Side Shields are provided on both sidesof the Baler to cover and protect drives and adjustableportion of the TDC system. The Side Shields should beinstalled (latched on later models) and the doors shouldbe closed and latched whenever the Baler is running.

1 – Large Hinged Guard Doors (Both Sides)2 – Side Shields (Both Sides)3 – Side Shield Latch (Behind Shield, later models)

Fig. 10

1 23

Page 26: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 5 – Controls & Safety Equipment

907520/CP0600 24 Printed in U.S.A.

WARNINGWhen working inside the guard doors or sideshields, BE SURE to exercise the MANDATO-RY SAFETY SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE (page10).

Pickup V-Belt Guard (Fig. 11)The pinch point of the Pickup Drive Belt is shielded witha Guard. BE SURE that the Guard is always securelyfastened in place while operating the Baler.

1 – Pickup V-Belt Guard

Fig. 11

1

HITCHJACK (Fig. 12)A Hitchjack is furnished with the Baler to support themachine when the tractor is disconnected as well asfacilitate aligning the Hitch Clevis with the tractordrawbar for hookup.

When the Jack is NOT being used to support the Balerand to prevent it from being damaged by the tractor tire,it can be removed and relocated to a “Storage” positionon the inside of the Drawbar on the left side. Wrap theChain around the Jack Handle, before inserting theLocking Pin through the Hub holes, to prevent theHandle from dragging on the ground.

1 – “Storage” Position for Hitchjack on Hub2 – PTO Supported on CV Stand3 – Hitchjack in “Supporting” Position

Fig. 12

1

23

WARNINGBE SURE the locking pin is entirely and prop-erly inserted through both hub holes on thejackstand BEFORE disconnecting the balerfrom the tractor.

REVERSING WRENCH(Figs. 13 & 14)The Round Baler is provided with a Reversing WrenchHandle for manually rotating the Transmission OutputShaft. When NOT in use, the Wrench should be in astored position located underneath the left HingedGuard Door (Fig. 14).

Page 27: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 5 – Controls & Safety Equipment

Printed in U.S.A. 25 907520/CP0600

WARNINGALWAYS exercise the MANDATORY SAFETYSHUTDOWN PROCEDURE (page 10) BEFOREusing the reversing wrench. Also, BE SURE toreplace the wrench in its storage location BE-FORE resuming baler operation.

1 – Reversing Wrench Being Used to Reverse Drive2 – Transmission Output Shaft

Fig. 13

1

2

1 – Reversing Wrench In “Storage” Position2 – Hinged Guard Door

Fig. 14: Left Side View of Baler

12

TDC PRESSURE RELIEF (Fig. 15)A Pressure Relief Valve is provided on top of the TDCReservoir to automatically release excessive (beyond300 PSI or 2100 kPa) pressure build-up. The ReliefValve helps to prevent TDC system component damage.The Relief Valve is covered with a protective plastic capthat should remain in place at all times.

1 – Pressure Relief Valve2 – Total Density Control (TDC) Reservoir

Fig. 15

1

2

AUTOMATIC BALE CONTROLSYSTEM (OPTIONAL) (Fig. 16)

The Automatic Bale Control System model Baler comesequipped from the factory with the Automatic BaleControl System factory installed. The system providesan information center and Baler control for the operatorfrom the tractor. If the Baler is equipped with the QuickWrap option, the operator may also change from twinetying to a netting wrap without having to leave thetractor.

Fig. 16: Auto-Electric Control Module

Page 28: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 5 – Controls & Safety Equipment

907520/CP0600 26 Printed in U.S.A.

AUTOMATIC TWINE WRAP SYSTEM(Fig. 17)The Automatic Twine Wrap model Baler comesequipped with the Auto Twine Wrap Control Systemdealer installed. The system provides for automatedtwine wrapping of the bale and as an information centerduring the baling operation. Bales may also be wrappedin a manual mode. This system is NOT for use on Balersthat are equipped with a Net Wrap system.

Fig. 17: Auto Twine Control Module

MANUAL TWINE WRAP SYSTEM(Fig. 18)The manual tie model Baler comes with a Manual TwineWrap system that is dealer installed. A Baler soequipped will allow manual control of the twine tyingcycle from the tractor.

1 – Twine Arm Positioning Switch

Fig. 18: Manual Twine Control Box

1

SAFETY CHAIN & TRANSPORTLIGHTING (Figs. 19 & 20)

CAUTIONALWAYS follow state and local regulations re-garding a safety chain and transport lightingwhen towing farm equipment on a public high-way! BE SURE to check with local law enforce-ment agencies for your own particular regula-tions. Unless otherwise prohibited, use aSlow-Moving Vehicle (SMV) emblem. Only asafety chain (NOT an elastic or nylon/plastictow strap) should be used to retain the con-nection between the towing and towed ma-chine, in the event of separation of the primaryattaching system.

As required or when desired, the Baler should beequipped with the optional safety chain for transportingthe unit on public highways. The chain should be routedas shown in Fig. 19. The Balers are equipped withTransport Lights, which are standard equipment.

Page 29: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 5 – Controls & Safety Equipment

Printed in U.S.A. 27 907520/CP0600

1 – Telescoping PTO Drive with Drive Shield Tubes2 – CV Stand in “Storage” Position3 – Locking Hitchbolt4 – Drawbar Clevis (Provided)5 – Chain Secured Around Tractor Frame Member6 – Safety Chain Attached Around Baler Frame

Fig. 19: Optional Safety Chain

1

23

4

56

1 – Transport Lighting

Fig. 20

1 1

TELESCOPING PTO DRIVE(Figs. 19 & 21)The Telescoping PTO Drive is designed to rotate freelyinside the Drive Shield Tubes.

NOTE: ALWAYS orient and attach the PTODrive with the CV end coupled to the tractor PTOshaft.

The Telescoping PTO Drive is provided with a Spring-loaded Locking Device on each end to positively lockthe Drive connections onto the tractor PTO shaft and theBaler Drive Input Shaft. Depress the Locking Device,against the Spring tension, and slide the Yoke onto itsrespective Drive Shaft. Release the Locking Device andmove the Yoke ahead or back until the Lock engagesinto the groove of its respective Shaft.

1 – Telescoping PTO Drive with Drive Shield Tubes2 – Spring-loaded Locking Device Placed onto

CV Stand

Fig. 21

2

1

WARNINGBE SURE that the telescoping drive rotatesfreely inside the drive shield tubes at all times.BE SURE the telescoping drive connectionsare properly secured to the tractor PTO shaftand baler drive input shaft BEFORE startingthe tractor engine. Also, BE SURE the tractormaster shield is in place and properly securedBEFORE starting the tractor.

NOTE: For your convenience when the Baler isdisconnected from the tractor, the PTO can beplaced onto the CV Stand, mounted on the rightside of the Hitch Clevis assembly. The CV Stand isdesigned to be pivoted out of the way when NOTin use. In addition, when transporting the Baler,leave the Telescoping PTO Drive attached to thetractor. If the PTO is NOT connected, it should bedisconnected from the Baler and stored in or on thetowing vehicle.

Page 30: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 28 Printed in U.S.A.

CHAPTER 6OPERATION

1 – Shuttle Stop2 – Shuttle Chain Adjustment Bolt3 – Shuttle Lock in “Storage” Position4 – Shuttle Chain5 – Density Cylinder Sprocket6 – Density Cylinder7 – Gate Cylinder8 – Bale Starter Torsion Spring9 – Scraper Roller Overrunning Clutch Sprocket

10 – 16″ Roller Driven Sprocket11 – Adjustable Wheel Spindle12 – 8″ Roller Drive Sprocket13 – Transmission Drive Sprocket14 – 8″ Floor Roller Idler15 – 16″ Floor Roller Idler

16 – Spring-loaded idler17 – Packing Roller Spring Adjustment18 – Packing Roll Stop Adjustment Bolt19 – Windguard20 – Windguard Latch21 – Left Twine Feed Sensor*22 – Baler to Tractor Connector23 – Tractor Battery24 – Tractor Control Module25 – Bale Size Sensor*26 – Implement Module*27 – Shuttle Return & Full Size Bale Sensor*28 – Gate Latch Sensor*

*Auto-Electric Models ONLY

�� �

!

�!

��

"�

��

��

�� ��

��

��

��

��

���!

��

��

��

�"

��

Fig. 22: Component Identification - Left Side

Page 31: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 29 907520/CP0600

1 – Overfill Clutch Actuator2 – Excessive Pressure Relief & Adapter3 – Valve Stem4 – Shuttle Lock (Engaged)5 – Shuttle6 – Shuttle Stop7 – TDC Reservoir Sight Tube8 – Belt Drive Roller9 – Re-wrap Roller

10 – Belts11 – Valve Trip Mechanism12 – Adjustable Relief Valve13 – Density Cylinder14 – Bale Starter15 – Packing Roll Compression Spring16 – Pickup Height Adjustment Crank17 – Idler Assembly Pivot18 – Scraper Roller19 – Pickup Stop20 – Packing Roller

21 – Packing Roller Drive Chain22 – Pickup Driven Sheave23 – Pickup Idler Pulley24 – Cable From Overfill Clutch to Stop Pickup25 – 8″ Lower Roller26 – 16″ Lower Roller27 – Bale Starter Roller28 – Adjustable Gate End Roller29 – Gate Latch30 – Adjustable Gate Latch Lift Rod31 – Belt Tracking Roller32 – Gate Cylinder33 – Pressure Gauge (TDC Reservoir)34 – Trip Arm35 – Trip Spacer36 – Density Cylinder Sprocket37 – TDC Reservoir38 – Bale Counter (Manual Balers ONLY)39 – Right Twine Feed Sensor (Auto-Electric ONLY)40 – Pickup Flotation Spring

� �! � ��

"

��

�� �

��

�"

��

��

��

��

��

��

�!

�!�"

��

���������!

��

��

��

�"

��

��

��

��

��#$�%��#

Fig. 23: Component Identification - Right Side

Page 32: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 30 Printed in U.S.A.

HOW BALER FUNCTIONS(Figs. 22 & 23)Crop material is picked off the ground by the 4-Tinebar,Closed-style Pickup and delivered to the throat of theunit where it is pressed by the Packing Roller against theLower Roller. The Rollers then carry the crop to theback of the unit where the crop meets the Belts which aretraveling toward the front of the unit. The Belts carry thecrop forward and over the top of the lower incoming matof material until it comes in contact with the Bale StarterFingers. The Fingers deflect material down into theincoming mat of material to form a roll of crop materialor bale core.

As the round core of material gets larger in size, the BaleStarter is lifted from the area to avoid contact with thebale. As the bale increases in size, the additionalBelting, required to wrap the bale, is released by the BeltShuttle as it moves toward the rear of the Baler. Belttension and bale density control is governed by the TotalDensity Control (TDC) system. The windrow anddriving pattern of the Baler operator determines howwell the material is distributed across the bale.

NOTE: It may be necessary to weave from oneside of the windrow to the other in order to properlydistribute crop into the baling chamber.

On manual control models, when the Bale Size Indica-tor reaches the preferred size, the twine can be wrappedaround the bale. Once tied, the bale is ejected by openingthe Gate and the process of forming another bale can berestarted. The maximum bale size is “5” (for RB1475)or “6” (for RB1875),

NOTE: It may be necessary to back up severalfeet before ejecting the bale to allow room to closeand latch the tailgate without contacting the cropwindrow.

HOW TDC SYSTEM FUNCTIONS(Figs. 24, 25 & 26)The Belt Tension and subsequent bale density iscontrolled by the Total Density Control (TDC) system.The major components of this system include aReservoir, two Density Cylinders, an adjustable Pres-sure Relief Valve, and a Manifold with a Trip Mecha-nism. This unique TDC system is self-contained and iscompletely independent of the tractor hydraulic system.The TDC system supplies a tensioning force to the Beltswhich, in turn, exerts a compressive force on theforming bale.

During the initial bale forming stage, the force exertedby the Density Cylinders onto the Belts is directly

related to the air pressure in the Reservoir. As the baleincreases in size, the additional Belting required isreleased by the Belt Shuttle as it moves toward the rearof the Baler. This rearward travel of the Belt Shuttleextends the Density Cylinders and forces hydraulic fluidout of the Cylinders, through a Manifold and into theReservoir. This additional fluid further compresses theair in the Reservoir and causes an increase of pressureresulting in Belt tension.

1 – Air Pressure2 – Pressurized Reservoir3 – Oil4 – Pressure Reading of 140 to 150 PSI

(980 to 1050 kPa) (Shuttle Returned)5 – Adjustable Relief Valve Setting 150 to 450 PSI for

RB1475 & 150 to 550 PSI for RB1875(1050 to 3,150 kPa for RB1475, 1050 to 3850 kPafor RB1875)

6 – To Left Cylinder7 – Shuttle Cylinder

Fig. 24: Core Formation Detail

ÎÎÎÎ

&'�

!

As the Cylinders continue to extend, the Valve TripMechanism is contacted by the Trip Spacer on the TripArm of the right Density Cylinder Clevis. As the ValveTrip Mechanism is triggered, the free flow path throughthe Manifold is blocked off and the hydraulic fluid isredirected through the adjustable Pressure Relief Valveon its way to the Reservoir. The Relief Valve works tocreate a pressure differential between the DensityCylinders and the Reservoir. This means that the fluidpressure in the Density Cylinders has to reach a presetvalue above the pressure in the Reservoir before theRelief Valve will relieve and allow the fluid to passthrough to the Reservoir.

Page 33: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 31 907520/CP0600

As the bale continues to grow and the Cylinders continueto extend, the TDC system continues to function in themanner previously described. When the bale is ejectedfrom the Baler, the pressure in the line from the DensityCylinders to the Relief Valve drops below the pressurein the Reservoir. This causes a reverse flow of hydraulicfluid from the Reservoir back into the Density Cylin-ders. The Cylinders are retracted which in turn restoresthe Shuttle, the Belts and the Valve Trip Mechanism totheir original positions. The TDC system is once againready to start forming another bale.

1 – Air Pressure2 – Pressurized Reservoir3 – Oil4 – Pressure Reading of 170 to 290 PSI

(1190 to 2030 kPa)5 – Adjustable Relief Valve Setting 150 to 450 PSI for

RB1475 & 150 to 550 PSI for RB1875(1050 to 3,150 kPa for RB1475, 1050 to 3850 kPafor RB1875)

6 – To Left Cylinder7 – Shuttle Cylinder

Fig. 25: Bale Building(Beyond Core Formation) Detail

ÎÎÎÎ

&'�

!

BALE FORMATION &STORAGE TIPSThe following information provides guidelines forusing the Round Baler to get the most out of your cropand investment.

1 – Air Pressure2 – Pressurized Reservoir3 – Oil4 – Pressure Reading of 290 to 290 PSI

(1050 to 2030 kPa)5 – Adjustable Relief Valve Setting 150 to 450 PSI for

RB1475 & 1050 to 550 PSI for RB1875(1050 to 3,150 kPa for RB1475, 1050 to 3850 kPafor RB1875)

6 – 15 PSI (105 kPa)7 – To Left Cylinder8 – Shuttle Cylinder

Fig. 26: Bale Ejecting & Shuttle Return Detail

ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ

&'�

!

RB1475 & 1875Table of Approximate Core Formation

(Diameter Ranges in Inches) for Various TripArm and Manifold Settings

RB1475 TripArm Position

Diameter ofBale Core

1 (Top) 8

2 13

3 17

4 22

5 (Bottom) 27

Page 34: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 32 Printed in U.S.A.

Fig. 27: Bale Density & Formation Detail

A – Small Core with High Density Crop (See Curve 1)B – Small Core with Low Density Crop (See Curve 2)C – Large Core with High Density Crop (See Curve 3)D – Large Core with Low Density Crop (See Curve 4)1 – Curve for Core Formation “A”2 – Curve for Core Formation “B”

3 – Curve for Core Formation “C”4 – Curve for Core Formation “D”5 – Outer Crop (Relief Pressure-controlled)6 – Core Formation (Air Pressure-controlled)7 – Increasing Bale Diameter8 – Increasing TDC System Bale Forming Pressure

!

( �

) �

Page 35: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 33 907520/CP0600

Optimum Conditions & BaleDensity (Fig. 27)

Optimum haying conditions are a combination of cropmaturity and moisture content. Because of changingweather conditions, NOT all hay can be baled underideal circumstances. The TDC system enables the Balerto adapt to these less than ideal conditions. In particular,the density of the bales can be adjusted to be morecompatible with baling conditions.

As moisture content increases, the bale density can bedecreased. Using the illustration and table provided fora reference, several types of bales can be formed byaltering either or both the Trip Spacer on the Trip Armwhich is connected to the right Density Cylinder or theRelief Valve pressure setting. Changing the Trip Spacerlocation to one of the other lower holes, progressivelyincreases the core diameter by delaying activation of theValve Trip Mechanism.

Bale density can be adjusted for different crop condi-tions and moisture contents by adjusting the ReliefValve setting. Turning the End Disc assembly clockwiseinto the Valve Body increases the Relief Pressure andbale density. The adjusted setting can then be locked inplace by turning the Locking Ring clockwise until it issnug against the Valve Body.

Bale Handling & Storage

WARNINGBales made with a Round Baler are LARGE,CYLINDRICAL and HEAVY! Serious personalinjury or property damage could result ifthe bales are not carefully and properly han-dled. MAKE SURE the bale will not roll whenejected from the baler. BE SURE that thetractor used with any bale handler is largeenough to safely handle the weight of thebales. Front or rear counter-weights maybe required. Using a bucket–style front endloader to move bales creates a hazard, be-cause the bale can roll out of the bucketand down the loader arms onto the operator.Generally, agricultural tractor Roll-over Pro-tective Structures (2–Post ROPS) are notintended to protect against falling bales. DoNOT lift round bales with the standard loaderunless you have proper bale restraining de-vices.

Because the bales are cylindrical and very heavy, specialcare MUST be exercised when ejecting them andstoring them to keep them from starting to roll. Whenthe bales are moved, make sure that the original bottomof the bale stays at the bottom. When moving bales to astorage area, observe the following recommendations tominimize crop loss:

1. Select a well-drained area with complete exposureto the sunlight.

2. Place the axis of the bales north and south so thesun can dry out the cylindrical surface of the baleas it travels from east to west.

3. Where space allows, set several bales in a rowwith their ends pushed tightly together to form along cylinder. Make sure that you do NOT form awater dam using too many bales in a row withoutskipping a space. Make sure to always maintain aclear path for the water to travel away from thebales.

4. Keep the rows of bales far enough apart so that onerow will NOT overshadow the adjoining row andcut down on exposure to full sunlight.

5. When bales are stored outside in conditions of ex-ceptionally high rainfall (especially drivingrains), spoilage due to water penetration can be re-duced by placing the shingled cylindrical surfaceof the bale in the direction of prevailing rain orwind. The shingled surface can be determined byrunning your hand along the edge of the bale. Onthe shingled surface, your hand will slide smooth-ly. The unshingled surface will offer more resis-tance to your hand movement.

BalingAfter transporting the Baler to the field, adjust thePickup height according to crop conditions and landcontour; refer to the Pickup Flotation topic in theAdjustment chapter of this manual for details. TheBaler Pickup should be run as high off the ground aspossible while still being able to completely pick up allof the crop.

IMPORTANT: The Pickup assembly MUST becarried off the ground. Running the Pickup too lowto the ground will result in excessive Tine wear orbreakage and possible damage to the PickupStripper Bands and Headers, Cam and CamBearings.

Move the Baler into position with respect to thewindrow and BE SURE to check the path in front of thePickup and ahead of the Baler before starting to bale.Then, start the PTO, bring the tractor RPM up to thedesired operating speed and begin baling.

Page 36: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 34 Printed in U.S.A.

If the windrow has been prepared to less than the fullwidth of the Bale Chamber, it will be necessary to drivethe Baler in a weaving fashion to fill the Chamber andstart the bale core. If the windrow has been preparedfor the full width of the Pickup, either 45 to 52″ (1143to 1321 mm) for an RB1475 or 61 to 68″ (1549 to1727 mm) for an RB1875, the Baler can be drivenstraight down the windrow while observing that thebale starts and continues to form properly. To obtainthe most uniform bales, the windrow should, whereverpossible, be made at or slightly larger than the BaleChamber width.

When baling a windrow which is about 1/2 the width ofthe Bale Chamber and after the core has started, stop theweaving process and drive straight with the windrowentering the Pickup as far to one side as possible.Continue driving the Baler with the windrow enteringon one side until the rotating bale is approximately 3 to4″ (76 to 102 mm) higher on one side than the other.Then, quickly cross over so that the windrow enters onthe other side of the Pickup and continue filling that sideuntil it is 3 to 4″ (76 to 102 mm) higher than the otherside. Continue crossing over from side to side until afull-sized bale is formed.

When baling a windrow which matches the full width ofthe Bale Chamber, drive straight down the windrowuntil the desired full-sized bale is formed.

IMPORTANT: Continuous feeding of materialprovides for smoother starting and better baleformation. Avoid non-cylindrical bales and baleswith loosely packed outside edges. Bothconditions can allow the Belts to fall off the endsof the bale and possibly tear out the Belt LacingHooks. In addition, this type of bale will weatherpoorly. Proper material preparation is a veryimportant factor in making good-shaped bales.Refer to the Preparing for Field Operation chapterof this manual for further details.

Baylage (High Moisture Hay)(RB1475 Only)NOTE: Anyone experimenting with this typeof storage procedure, for the first time, shoulddo so with limited samples, to minimize potentiallosses.

NOTE: Due to the extremely HEAVY bale thatresults from high moisture baling, we recommendthat bale sizes be kept under a 4 ft (1.2 m) diame-ter. It is further recommended that Balage baling belimited to using only an RB1475 Baler and equip-ping it with an accessory Silage Scraper Kit. Referto the Optional Features & Accessories chapter forordering information.

BALE SIZE VISUAL INDICATOR(MANUAL & AUTOMATIC TWINECONTROL MODELS) (Fig. 28)

The Bale is full-size when it reaches 5 feet (1.5 m) indiameter for the RB1475 Baler or 6 feet (1.8 m) indiameter for the RB1875 Baler. As a matter of personalpreference, the bale forming process can be stopped atany time before this size. For this reason, the Bale SizeVisual Indicator is provided as a visual aid to formingconsistent sized bales.

1 – Bale Size Visual Indicator2 – Pointer

Fig. 28

12

OVERFILL PROTECTION(Figs. 22 & 23)

The Baler is designed with an Overfill Clutch mecha-nism which automatically stops the Pickup when thebale becomes oversized. If the bale becomes oversized,the Shuttle will activate the Overfill Clutch Actuatorwhich is linked by a Cable to the Pickup Drive to stopthe Pickup and prevent damaging the Baler. When thishappens, simply back the Baler out of the windrow andtie or wrap the bale in the normal manner.

Page 37: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 35 907520/CP0600

MANUAL TWINE WRAP(Figs. 28 & 29)

NOTE: The procedure described is the manualsequence. The entire process of wrapping thebale with twine is done from the tractor seat.

The position of the Pointer on the Bale Size Indicatorcan be used as a fairly accurate gauge for forming thedesired size bale. When the desired size bale is formed,stop Baler forward travel. Then, swing the Twine Armso that it is straight back.

NOTE: The Twine Arm is actuated by movingthe Twine Arm Positioning Switch to the “FOR-WARD” position to move the Twine Arm from rightto left. Moving the Twine Arm Positioning Switch tothe “REV” (Reverse) position moves the TwineArm from left to right.

NOTE: By moving the Twine Arm to the middleof the Baler, appropriate lengths of twine arebrought out for starting to wrap a new bale.

Then, drive forward again to take in a small amount ofmaterial to start feeding the twine into the Baler.

DANGERNEVER attempt to clean or manually feed thebaler when it is running. Material feeds intothe baler faster than you can react to releaseit. You may become entangled in movingbelts, pick-up or rollers. Failure to heed canresult in death or serious injury.

When the twine can be seen moving into the Twine Arm,stop Baler forward travel. Allow the twine to make atleast one full wrap in this location and then move theTwine Arm to the left side.

NOTE: Moving the Twine Arm all the way to theleft engages and locks the Twine Cutoff Jaws in theopen position.

NOTE: Normally, the bale can be adequatelytied with two wraps of twine on the left side, severalwraps across the center of the bale and two wrapson the right side. If the material being baled is slip-pery, it will be beneficial to place two wraps of twineon the center of the bale before moving to the leftside in order to prevent the twine from sliding off theend of the bale. It may also be necessary to adjustthe positions of the end wraps depending on thecrop being baled.

When the Twine Arm returns all the way to the right, theTwine Jaws will snap closed and the twine will be cut.The wrapped bale can now be ejected from the Baler andbaling can resume.

1 – Twine Arm Positioning Switch

Fig. 29

1

AUTOMATIC TWINE WRAP SYSTEM

FeaturesThe Auto Twine Wrap Control System exhibits thefollowing features and characteristics:

1. AUTO/MANUAL Mode Selection - fully auto-matic tie system or manual tie system.

2. Continuous moving Twine Arm distributes twinein a helical pattern across the bale.

3. A daily bale counter which can be reset to Zero (0)

4. A lifetime bale counter which cannot be reset

5. The error message “SEt” is displayed when thetwine wrapping system is not functioning proper-ly (Refer to the Troubleshooting chapter).

Page 38: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 36 Printed in U.S.A.

6. Two spaced audible tones are sounded when thetie cycle starts.

7. The message “tIE” is displayed while the systemis in the twine tie sequence.

8. One audible tone is sounded and the message“OPEn” “GAtE” is displayed when the tie se-quence is through and the Baler is ready for thebale to be discharged. The message “OPEn”“GAtE” remains displayed until the bale is dis-charged.

9. One audible tone is sounded when the Tailgate isfirst opened and then repeated every eight secondswhile the Tailgate remains open.

10. Two quick audible tones are sounded when theTailgate is closed and latched.

OperationThe Control Module is a monitor and controller for theTwine Arm. When a bale is formed, a sequence is startedthat drives the Twine Arm across the face of the bale.The twine is applied in a predetermined helical patternacross the face of the bale and is designed to apply extratwine on each bale end.

Bales can be tied in a manual or fully automatic mode.The Control Module also keeps a daily and lifetimecount of bales made.

NOTE: This Auto Twine Control is NOT in-tended for use on Balers equipped with QuickWrap.

Controls

Control Module (Fig. 30)

1 – Mode Switch (AUTO/MANUAL)2 – Manual Mode Actuator Switch

(EXTEND/NEUTRAL/RETRACT)3 – POWER Switch (ON/OFF)4 – Channel 5 Symbol – Twine Arm Position5 – Channel 4 Symbol – Twine Arm Pause6 – INCREASE Key7 – Channel 3 Symbol – Twine End Wraps8 – DECREASE Key

Fig. 30: Automatic Twine Wrap Control Module Component Locations

9 – Harness Connector10 – Channel 2 Symbol – Twine Density

(No. of Wraps Across Bale)11 – Channel 1 Symbol – Bale Count12 – Tailgate Status Symbol (Closed)13 – Tailgate Status Symbol (Open)14 – Digital Display15 – SELECT Key (Channel Control)

1

3

2

678

10

9 5 4

11

13

12

15

14

Page 39: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 37 907520/CP0600

POWER Switch (Fig. 31)

Fig. 31: Power Switch

This Toggle Switch is used to power up and shut downthe Auto Twine System.

ON

Move the Switch Handle to the right to turn ControlModule on and power up the auto twine control system.

OFF

Move the Switch Handle to the left to power down thecontrol system. This will cause the display to go blankand the control system will not accept any signals fromany sensors.

Mode Switch (Fig. 32)

This Toggle Switch is used to direct power to either theSELECT Key for automatic control (AUTO mode) or tothe Actuator Switch for manual control (MANUALmode) of the Auto Twine System.

ToSELECTSwitch

ToActuatorSwitch

Fig. 32: Mode Switch

AUTO

Move the Switch Handle to the left to direct power to theSELECT Key for automatic twine control.

MANUAL

Move the Switch Handle to the right to direct power tothe Actuator Switch.

Actuator Switch (Fig. 33)This Toggle Switch is used to direct power to theActuator to manually EXTEND or RETRACT theTwine Arm.

NOTE: The Mode Switch (Fig. 32) MUST BE setto MANUAL for this Switch to function.

From MANUAL Positionof Mode Switch

Fig. 33: Actuator Switch(Manual Mode Operation, ONLY)

EXTEND

Move and hold the Switch Handle to the right to extendthe Actuator Rod and cause the Twine Arm to movetoward the left side of the Baler.

RETRACT

Move and hold the Switch Handle to the left to retractthe Actuator Rod and cause the Twine Arm to movetoward the right side of the Baler.

NEUTRAL

Release the Switch Handle to STOP actuator move-ment. Switch Handle will automatically return to centerposition when released.

SELECT Key (Fig. 34)

NOTE: Mode Switch. Fig. 32, must be set toAUTO for the SELECT Key to function.

The SELECT Key is used to advance the DigitalDisplay one channel each time it is pressed. Each of thefive channels is used to control a different segment ofthe tie cycle. The active channel is indicated by thechevron that points toward the associated icon shownbelow the display. The value for each channel (exceptchannel 1) can be changed by pressing the INCREASEor DECREASE Key. If a change is not made to theactive channel within 5 seconds, the display will defaultback to channel 1. Channel 1 is the default channel andit indicates the daily bale count and the condition of theTailgate (Open or Closed).

Page 40: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 38 Printed in U.S.A.

NOTE: See separate topics later in this chapterfor information about the purpose and settings foreach channel and for the INCREASE and DE-CREASE Keys.

FromAUTO Position of

Mode Switch

ÁÁ

Fig. 34: Control Module Keypad & Display

The SELECT Key is also used to view the lifetime balecount. To show lifetime bale count since installation ofthe Control Module, press and hold down the SELECTKey for 5 seconds.

INCREASE & DECREASE Keys (SeeFig. 34)

While in “AUTO” mode and NOT on channel 1, presseither Key to change the value for the function beingdisplayed. (See separate topics later in this chapter forinformation about the purpose and settings for eachchannel.)

NOTE: To reset the Bale Count to “0”, press andhold the DECREASE and INCREASE Keys simul-taneously.

Digital Displays

Default Reset

To return all of the channels back to the factory setdefaults, press and hold the INCREASE and DE-CREASE Keys simultaneously while moving thePOWER Switch Lever to ON.

Lifetime Bale Count

Press and hold the SELECT Switch for 5 seconds tohave the Display show total bales made since theControl Module was first installed.Range 0–9999.

NOTE: The Tailgate Open and Closed indica-tors on the Display are disabled while total balecount is displayed.

NOTE: Press the SELECT Key, Fig. 34, to ad-vance from one channel (display) to the next.

Channel 1 – Daily Bale Count –

Default Display (Fig. 35)

Bale Count Display when Tailgate is Open

Bale Count Display when Tailgate is Closed

Fig. 35: Channel 1 Digital Display

The Daily Bale Count displays the number of balesmade since the last time the counter was set to zero

Page 41: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 39 907520/CP0600

(Range is 0-999). This is the default display and is activewhenever: the Control Module is turned on, is NOT ina “tie” sequence, or the SELECT Key has NOT beenpressed within the last 5 seconds to change to a differentchannel.

This display also indicates the condition of the Tailgate.When the Tailgate is “closed”, the bottom segment ofthe leftmost digit is displayed (next to the icon showinga “closed” tailgate – see top illustration in Fig. 35);likewise, when the Tailgate is “open”, the top segmentof the leftmost digit is displayed (next to the iconshowing an “open” tailgate with a discharged bale – seebottom illustration in Fig. 35).

To reset the Daily Bale Counter to Zero, press and holdthe DECREASE and INCREASE Keys, simultaneous-ly, to reset the Daily Bale Count display to ZERO.

NOTE: Numerical values (marked with an *) forchannels 2 and 3 are arbitrary values; they ONLYrepresent a range, NOT an actual count.

Channel 2 – Twine Density(Spacing of Wraps Across Bale)(Fig. 36)

Fig. 36: Channel 2 – Twine Density

Press DECREASE Key for more spacing betweenwraps (fewer overall wraps) or INCREASE Key for lessspacing between wraps (more overall wraps).Range is 0–12* in 1 step increments; Default is 6.

NOTE: The Twine Arm moves faster across theface of the bale as the setting approaches “0”.

* Arbitrary Numbers

Channel 3 – Twine End Wraps(Fig. 37)

Fig. 37: Channel 3 – Twine End Wraps

Press DECREASE for fewer wraps or INCREASE formore wraps.Range is 0–9* in 1 step increments; Default is 3).

NOTE: The Twine Arm pauses for a shorter pe-riod of time at each bale end as the setting ap-proaches “0”.

* Arbitrary Numbers

Channel 4 – Twine Arm Pause(Delay for Twine to Start on Bale)(Fig. 38)

Fig. 38: Channel 4 – Twine Arm Pause

Press the DECREASE Key for a shorter delay or theINCREASE Key for a longer delay.Range 0–20 seconds in 1 second increments; Default is2 seconds.

NOTE: The Twine Arm pause time is shorter asthe setting approaches “0”.

Page 42: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 40 Printed in U.S.A.

Channel 5 – Twine Arm Position(Position of Arm for Twine to Start onBale) (Fig. 39)

Fig. 39: Channel 5 – Twine Arm Position

Press the DECREASE Switch to cause the Twine Armto stop further toward the center of the Baler or theINCREASE Switch to cause the Twine Arm to stopfurther toward the left side of the Baler.Range 1–7 seconds in 0.5 second increments; Default is4 seconds.

NOTE: The position where the Twine Armpauses is closer to the right side of the baler as thesetting approaches “0”. For RB1475 Balers, DONOT set above 5.0 seconds or the twine tie se-quence will stop and the “SET” error message willdisplay.

NOTE: Any changes made while in the AUTOmode will be preserved in memory.

AUTOMATIC BALE CONTROLSYSTEM

FeaturesThe Baler Wrap Control System exhibits the followingfeatures and characteristics:

1. A daily bale count which is resettable to Zero (0)

2. A life time count which is NOT resettable

3. Programmable to specific Gehl Baler models

4. Bale size selection from 3 feet (.9 m) to the maxi-mum bale size in 6 inch (152 mm) increments

5. Exclusive Twine/Quick Wrap Netting selectionfrom the tractor seat

6. Audible pulsing Beeper sounds and an Error Codeis displayed when bale growth and wrapping sys-tems are not functioning properly. The followinglists all of the “Error Message” codes and what thecodes mean:

a. E1 - Out of twine or only one twine placedon bale

b. E2 - Out of netting

c. E3 - Twine/Netting NOT started

d. E5 - Twine Arm obstruction

e. E6 - Shuttle NOT returned

f. E7 - Twine or Netting started prematurely

g. E8 - End Wrap Pause Switch Adjustment/Faulty

h. E9 - Twine/Netting NOT cut off

i. E10 - Insufficient (low) voltage or (low)amperage

7. MANUAL/AUTO Selection - fully automatic tiesystem or manual tie system

8. Cycle feature to manually start the auto tie cycleat anytime.

9. Feature displaying the per cent (%) of Nettingused from the roll (resettable)

10. Adjustable number (#) of wraps - for both twineor net from the Control Module

11. Automatic shutdown after 30 minutes if NO Key-pad entries or input entries are detected from thebaler sensors

12. Enlarging Bar Graph grows as bale size grows

13. One audible tone sounds when the bale size getsto within 6 inches of the selected bale size; at thistime, the Bar Graph also starts to flash

14. Three audible tones sound when the bale reachesthe selected bale size to mark the start of the tieing/wrapping cycle

15. Two audible tones sound when the tieing/wrap-ping cycle has been successfully completed

16. One audible tone sounds and the “GO” Arrow dis-plays when baling can resume

17. Flashing “CYCLE” Icon appears when tieing/wrapping cycle starts or when “CYCLE” Key istouched

18. Flashing “CYCLE” Icon goes solid ON whenTwine/Netting is starting to feed

19. “TAILGATE OPEN” Icon appears when Tailgateis open

20. To obtain a bale count (and a “GO” Arrow), thefollowing three things MUST happen:

Page 43: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 41 907520/CP0600

a. Successful Tie

b. Tailgate properly opens and closes

c. Shuttle MUST return to its “Home” position

21. Even displacement of wrapping material regard-less of baler rpm and bale size

Operating System

The following are the typical Keypad selections toactivate and operate the Electronic Bale Wrap ControlSystem:

NOTE: If, after initial “Power Up”, the display onthe Tractor Module lights up and goes blank withina few seconds:

1. Check that the power cord from the Baler isconnected to the tractor and all connectionsare clean and tight.

2. Faulty Implement Module. See Dealer.

After “Power Up”, the system will automatically de-fault to the settings as they were before “PowerDown”. Keypad activations always require that theKeypad be pressed and temporarily held until abeep is heard and/or the Display changes.

“Power” Key

Press and hold the “Power” Key to power up (turn on)the control system.

To power down (turn off) the control system, press the“Power” Key. This will cause the display to go blank andthe control system will not accept any signals from thecab module or any sensors. However, bale wrappinginformation is preserved in memory (see Note, below).

NOTE: It is recommended to power down (turnoff) the control system by pressing the “Power” Keyanytime an interruption to the control system pow-er is anticipated. This will preserve the current balesize information by storing it in memory; if the con-trol system power is interrupted without poweringdown or in any other way (such as power loss dueto starting the tractor engine or disconnecting thePower Cable), the current bale size informationand the Bale Size Bar Graph will be lost.

NOTE: As noted above, pressing the “Power”Key will make the control system inoperable. How-ever, this does NOT eliminate all power consump-tion. If the Baler is going to be idle for a week ormore and remain hitched to the tractor, it is recom-mended that the Power Cord between the tractorand the Baler be separated to prevent draining ofthe tractor battery.

“Enter” Key

Whenever a key is pushed within the top two rows(Command Keys) of the keypad, a corresponding iconwill flash in the display. If no further commands areentered by pressing a key on the keypad within 5seconds, the flashing icon will stop and the system willreturn to its previous settings. In order for the system tounderstand and remember a new command, the com-mand must be followed by pushing the “ENTER” key.If the “ENTER” key is not pushed within 5 seconds, thesystem will return to its previous setting.

Page 44: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 42 Printed in U.S.A.

Pressing the “ENTER” key will also mute the audiblealarm when an error message is displayed. Muting thealarm will NOT clear the display of the error code untilthe error is corrected. Once the error is corrected,pressing the “ENTER” key will clear the display.

“Bale Size” Key

OR

To adjust the bale diameter:

1. Press the “BALE SIZE” key

The current programmed bale size will beshown on the display and the word “SIZE”will be flashing on and off at the lower lefthand side of the display.

2. Press the “+” key to increase bale size or press the“–” key to decrease bale size.

The Bale diameter shown in the display willrespond to key entries and will increase ordecrease in 6″ increments. Likewise, thelimiting icon on the Bar Graph will move upand down and align itself with the selectedbale size diameter.

3. Press the “ENTER” key to save the programmingchange made to the bale size.

“Twine/Net” Key

NOTE: The current mode of wrapping can beidentified by the icon in the top right center of the

display; either for NET mode or for TWINEmode.

To alternate between TWINE and NET modes formaking changes:

1. To enact a change in the wrapping mode, press the“TWINE/NET” key. The alternate wrappingmode should begin flashing in the top right centerof the display.

2. Verify that the flashing icon represents the desiredwrapping mode. If it does, press “ENTER” tosave. The flashing icon should have switched tosolid.

NOTE: The control will not switch from twine tonet if it is not programmed with the correct code fora Quick Wrap baler. See Machine OperatingCodes topic in this chapter for Baler codes.

Amount of Wraps

The values for wrapping a bale are different for twinethan they are for net. When adjusting the number ofwraps, you are only changing the value of wraps thatpertain to the wrapping mode for which you areprogrammed. For example, if programmed to twine,only the number of twine wraps change. If programmedto net, only the number of net wraps change. If thecontrol is switched from twine to net, the system willremember any previous setting for the number of netwraps. The same holds true when switching from net totwine.

Page 45: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 43 907520/CP0600

OR

To adjust the number of wraps (Auto Mode Only), presseither the “+” or “–” key. A numeric value will appearin the display along with the flashing icon “WRAPS”.To increase the numeric value (number of wraps),continue to push the “+” key. To decrease the number ofwraps, push the “–” key.

When in the “TWINE” Mode, the numeric value is theapproximate number of wraps of twine placed across thecircumference of the bale. The value increases anddecreases by increments of 1 between 1 and 10, with 10being the greatest amount of twine.

NOTE: Settings 4 and 5 will apply the sameamount of wraps (approximately four wraps)across the bale. However, a setting of 4 or lower willplace approximately 2-1/2 end wraps while a set-ting of 5 or higher will place approximately 3-1/2end wraps. On Settings 1 and 10, the Twine Armwill NOT stop when travelling from the left side tothe right side when applying twine.

When in the “NET” mode, the numeric value on thedisplay is the approximate number of times the net iswrapped around the circumference of the bale (Onewrap equals one time around the bale). The system canbe adjusted in 0.25 wrap increments between 1.25 and9.75.

“Cycle” Key

To start the wrapping cycle early (Auto Mode Only):

1. Press the “CYCLE” key. The flashing cycle iconshould be visible in the upper right hand corner ofthe display. This indicates that the control systemhas been switched to the wrapping mode.

2. Press the “ENTER” key. This confirms that youwant to start the wrapping cycle. The actuators foreither the netting or twine arm should have startedand continued in the automatic wrapping cycle.

Bale Count (Daily)To clear the daily count, press and hold the “–” key andthe “+” key simultaneously until a “0” appears on thedisplay.

Press and Holdfor 5 Seconds

Bale Count (Lifetime)To check the lifetime count, press the “ENTER” key andhold it until the first number (1000’s digit) is displayed.Then, release the “ENTER” key before the secondnumber (hundreds) is displayed.

Page 46: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 44 Printed in U.S.A.

NOTE: The display will alternate between twosets of numbers. For a count under 1000, the dis-play will first show “0” (the 1000’s digit) and the se-cond display will be the count under 1,000. Forcounts over 1,000, the 1st display will be the num-ber of 1000’s and the second display will be thecount under 1,000.

Example:A lifetime count of 13,568 would alternatelydisplay as 13 (for the 1000’s count) and 568 (forthe count under 1,000).

1stFlashedCount

2ndFlashedCount

NOTE: The maximum lifetime count can be999,999. To clear the display of the lifetime countmode, press “ENTER” while the second set ofnumbers (hundreds) is on the display.

SWITCHING FROM AUTO TOMANUAL MODE

Through the course of daily operation in the “AUTO-matic” mode, it may become necessary to switch to the“MANUAL” mode to perform a troubleshooting se-quence, an adjustment or restart the system after aparticular Error Message has been acknowledged andrectified. To change from “AUTO” to “MANUAL”,power-up (if NOT already power-up), press the“MANUAL/AUTO” key, hear a single beep andobserve that the Display shows the MAN Icon flashing.Then, press the “ENTER” key to lock-in the “MANU-AL” mode.

Operation in the Manual ModeThe primary function of the Manual Mode is tomanually control the extension and retraction of thetwine arm actuator or Quick Wrap actuator. Typically,this is required to route twine through the twine arm orservice the baler.

The Manual Mode can be used when building andwrapping a bale, should the Auto Mode becomeenabled. When operating in the Manual Mode, many ofthe monitoring sensors on the baler are electronicallyswitched off. The Manual Mode will allow the operatorto select twine or net, change bale size, and count bales.The bale size Bar Graph will function the same as in theAuto Mode as will the tailgate open and close icon withthe go arrow.

NOTE: If the bale size sensor or the tailgatesensor were to become disabled, the display willnot function properly. However, it will still be pos-sible to operate the actuators manually, providingthere is sufficient power to the implement controlmodule and the actuators.

The Manual Mode does not notify the operator when thewrapping is started. The flashing cycle icon will neverstay on solid. The flashing icon is only used as anindicator to inform the operator that the manual tiesystem is in process and that the actuator is not in thehome position.

Manual Mode Twine Arm Extension& Retraction

When in the “MANUAL” mode, the following steps canbe carried out to extend and retract the Twine Arm inorder to facilitate twine routing or whatever needs to bemanually accomplished:

Page 47: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 45 907520/CP0600

1. Press and hold the (+) “EXTEND” key, hear abeep, and observe that the “CYCLE” Icon comeson and continues to flash as the Twine Arm contin-ues to move away from the “home” position. Re-lease the key to stop Twine Arm movement.

2. Press and hold the (–) “RETRACT” key, hear abeep, and observe that the “CYCLE” Icon comeson and continues to flash as the Twine Arm contin-ues to move toward the “home” position. Releasethe key to stop Twine Arm movement.

NOTE: The Twine Arm must have stalled in theHome Position before the flashing cycle icon willdisappear. The system will not accept any furthercommands until the “CYCLE” icon is cleared fromthe display.

Manual Quick Wrap Activation& De-activation

When in the “MANUAL” mode, the following steps canbe carried out to extend and retract the Wrap ControlActuator whenever this needs to be manually accom-plished:

1. Press and hold the (+) “EXTEND” key, hear abeep, and observe that the “CYCLE” Icon comeson and continues to flash as the Wrap Control Ac-tuator Shaft continues to move out. Release thekey to stop Actuator movement.

2. Press and hold the (–) “RETRACT” key, hear abeep, and observe that the “CYCLE” Icon comeson and continues to flash as the Wrap Control Ac-tuator Shaft continues to retract. Release the keyto stop Actuator movement.

NOTE: The Net Wrap Actuator must havestalled in the Home Position before the flashingcycle icon will disappear. The system will not ac-cept any further commands until the “CYCLE” iconis cleared from the display.

% Of Net Left

When operating in the Net Mode, the control systemwill keep track of the amount of net being consumed,which takes into account the number of wraps and balediameter. The system works best when using thesuggested net supplied by Gehl dealers. Reset the % ofnet left value shown each time you add a new roll of net.To do this, push the “CYCLE” key twice and hold for 5seconds the second time.

To show the % of net left on the display, push the cycletwice. The value on the display will represent theamount of net left on the net roll.

Page 48: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 46 Printed in U.S.A.

NORMAL BALING IN AUTOMATICCYCLEThe following information displays the normal balingcycle from indications by the Tractor Module. With all

of the desired settings established, recognize the follow-ing circumstances and events that could occur.

Bar GraphStarts To Build To

Pre-selectedSize

Bar GraphFlashes whenBale Diameteris 6″ less thanselected balesize. {HornEmits (1)

Beep}

Solid BarGraph{Horn

Emits (3)Beeps} whenbale reaches

predeterminedsize

Go ArrowDisappears

Cycle IconFlashes When

TieCycle Starts

Cycle IconGoes Solid WhenNetting or Both

Twines StartWrapping on

Bale {Horn Emits(1) Beep}

HornEmits (2)

Beeps WhenTie CycleFinishes

At Start,Baler andGo Arrow

Signify Readyto Bale

Open BalerGate and

Eject Bale.Bar Graphresets to 0

Close BalerGate After

Bale isEjected

Go Arrow Re-appearsafter Tailgate is

latched and Shuttlehas returned. {HornEmits (1) Beep} &

Bale count increasesby one

Page 49: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 47 907520/CP0600

NORMAL BALING IN AUTOMATICCYCLE WITH ERRORSThe following information displays the normal balingcycle with potential error Displays interjected in the

various stages of the baling cycle when they are mostlikely to be displayed by the Tractor Module. With all ofthe desired settings established, recognize the followingcircumstances that could occur.

Possible

Bar GraphFlashes 6

inches BeforePre-selected

Size. {SystemEmits (1)

Beep}

Go ArrowDisappears

Cycle IconGoes SolidNetting or

Twine Starts

SystemEmits (2)

Beeps WhenTie CycleFinishes

At Start,Baler andGo Arrow

Signify Readyto Bale

Open BalerGate andEject Bale

Close BalerGate After

Bale isEjected

System Cycle IsCompleted, Go Arrow

Re-appears{System Emits

(1) Beep}

Possible

Bar GraphStarts To Build To

Pre-selectedSize

Possible

Solid BarGraph

{SystemEmits (3)Beeps}

Possible

Cycle IconFlashes When

TieCycle Starts

Possible

PossiblePossible

Possible

Possible

Possible

Page 50: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 48 Printed in U.S.A.

MANUALLY BUILDING A BALE TOTEST AUTO–ELECTRIC CONTROLSYSTEM

PreparationUnder certain conditions it may be necessary to test theAuto–Electric Control System by manually simulatingthe building of a bale. To simulate building a bale,proceed as follows:

1. Secure the Baler in a safe, stable and level locationto avoid any inadvertent repositioning of the ma-chine. The Tailgate should be in the closed andlatched position.

2. Disconnect the Baler Driveline from the tractorand place the tractor end of the Driveline onto theDriveline Support provided on the Baler.

Required Equipment3. The following equipment is need to be able to per-

form the simulated bale:

a. A 12 Volt DC power supply capable of de-livering a 20 ampere flow.

b. Two people capable of spinning the TwineWheels.

c. One small magnet.

4. Connect the Auto–Electric Control System to the12 Volt DC power supply. Check that all WiringHarnesses are securely fastened.

5. Become familiar with the Auto–Electric ControlSystem as described in the Operation chapter ofthis Operator’s Manual. Refer to the Operationand Troubleshooting chapters of this manual ifproblems occur during the following procedure.

6. Power up the Auto–Electric Control System bypressing and holding the Power Key.

Machine Operating Codes7. Check that the Control System is programmed for

the correct Baler model. Press “+” and“MANUAL/AUTO” simultaneously (NOTE: +will increase the code and – will decrease thecode). Select “+” or “–” until the correct code thatmatches your Baler appears in the display. See thefollowing table to determine the correct code.Press “ENTER” Key.

Code # Baler Model & Wrap System

cd1 1475 with Twine Wrap ONLY

cd2 1475 with both Twine & Quick Wrap

cd5 1875 with Twine Wrap ONLY

cd6 1875 with both Twine & Quick Wrap

Select “AUTO” Mode

8. If the word “AUTO” does not appear on the top ofthe display, select the “MANUAL/AUTO” Key.After the flashing “AUTO” icon appears on thedisplay, select the “ENTER”Key. The displayshould appear as follows;

NOTE: It is important to have an arrow dis-played in front of the “BALER” icon to indicate thateverything is functioning properly.

Program “BALE SIZE”

9. Select the “BALE SIZE” Key. The words “BALESIZE” should appear flashing in the lower portionof the display. Push “+” or “–” (“+” to increase,“–” to decrease) until 3.00 appears in the display.Press the “ENTER” Key within 5 seconds to savethe 3.00 foot bale diameter value.

Select Wrapping System

10. If the Twine icon is not showing on the top of thedisplay, push the “TWINE/NET” Key and theTwine icon should appear on the top of the display.Press the “ENTER” Key within 5 seconds to savethe Twine Tieing mode.

Program Twine Wrap Density

11. Press the “–” Key. This will display the currentvalue for the twine application and a flashing“WRAP” icon will appear on the bottom of thedisplay. Use the “–” Key to toggle the twinedensity to 1. Press the “ENTER” Key within 5seconds to save the value.

Page 51: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 49 907520/CP0600

Building a Bale12. If the “GO ARROW” appears in the front of the

Baler icon, you can proceed to build a bale. Tobuild a bale, toggle the Bale Size Sensor up anddown. The Bale Size Sensor is located on the leftside of the Baler in the top front corner. The Sensorpivots about the Shuttle Stabilizer Sprocket. Eachtime the red light on the cord end of of the Sensorflashes, a count is being registered. After 9 counts,the Bar Graph on the display should begin to grow.Continue to toggle the Sensor. When the BarGraph reaches the 2-1/2 foot mark, one (1) audiblesignal will sound and the the Bar Graph will flashon and off. Keep toggling the Bale Size Sensoruntil three (3) audible signals are sounded and aflashing “CYCLE” icon appears in the upper righthand corner of the display (the “GO ARROW”will also disappear). At this point, the Twine Armshould extend and point directly to the back of theBaler while pausing.

13. The Twine Arm will remain at the pause positionuntil one of the following conditions occur:

a. If both twines have started on the bale (ac-complished only when both Twine Wheelshave rotated simultaneously), the TwineArm will advance to the left side of the Balerto apply end wraps and then proceed to“home” while making intermittent stops.

b. If, within 15 seconds, only one twine startson the bale (accomplished when only oneTwine Wheel rotated), the Twine Arm willstill wrap the bale, but with only one string.Once the wrapping mode is completed, anE–1 error code will display on the control in-dications that the bale was wrapped withonly one twine. The operator then has theoption to correct the problem and rewrap thebale by pressing the “CYCLE” and “EN-TER” keys or to eject the bale with only asingle twine.

c. If, after 15 seconds, neither twine has startedon the bale (accomplished when neitherTwine Wheel rotated), an E–3 error messagewill display on the control and the TwineArm will return to the home position.

Open Tailgate

14. Simulate opening the Tailgate by passing amagnet past the Tailgate switch. The“TAILGATE” icon should appear and thendisappear when the magnet is removed. The BaleSize Bar Graph should have also disappeared, theBale Count incremented by one, and the “GOARROW” icon should have reappeared in front ofthe “BALER” icon.

15. Repeat Steps 12., 13. & 14., if desired.

Page 52: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 50 Printed in U.S.A.

QUICK WRAP GENERALINFORMATION (Fig. 40)By design, either 1475 or 1875 Auto-Electric Balers canbe operated with either the Quick Wrap System or theTwine Tie (Wrap) System.

NOTE: In either case, only one or the other balewrapping system can be operated at a time. Refer tothis Operator’s Manual for Twine Tie System opera-tional information.

Fig. 40: Quick Wrap Unit Installedon RB1870 Baler

Quick Wrap Roll Selection

NOTE: For best results, it is recommended thatONLY high quality, GEHL approved Quick Wrapmaterial be used.

Quick Wrap Roll CareQuick Wrap material should always be properly pro-tected from moisture and damage. Snags in the materialcan result in unpredictable performance, poor baleappearance and reduced weatherability. BE SURE tostore the Quick Wrap material in a cool, dry place awayfrom direct sunlight. The protective covering shouldremain intact until the roll is placed onto the Quick WrapTailgate.

Quick Wrap Roll Installation(Figs. 41 & 42)

WARNINGWhen installing the net roll, take care toavoid pinching your fingers between therubber drive rollers.

1 – Rewrap Bar Lock2 – Rewrap Bar Locked in Position Toward

Rubber Pinch Roller3 – Normal Net Routing4 – Plastic Pipe5 – Net Roll in “Operating” Position6 – Knife Shield

Fig. 41: Quick Wrap Unit Installed

1

2

3

5

4

6

Page 53: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 51 907520/CP0600

1 – Netting Routed Into Pinch Rolls2 – Plastic Tube Passed Through Netting Roll and

Engaged in Net Roll Pivots On Each End3 – Rewrap bale in “Raised” Position

Fig. 42

2

2

1 3

1. On the Tractor Module, perform the steps requiredto fully extend the Control Actuator as listed in theManual Quick Wrap Activation & De-activationtopic of this chapter.

2. Exercise the MANDATORY SAFETY SHUT-DOWN PROCEDURE (Page 10).

3. Place Net Roll on Tailgate (Lower Shield).

4. Install Plastic Pipe through center of Net RollCore, center Roll on the Plastic Pipe and place theRoll and Pipe into the Net Pivots on each end ofTailgate.

5. Rotate the Lower Shield and Net Roll into place.

6. Rotate Rewrap Bar away from Rubber Pinch Rolland lock upward.

7. Route Net end over Stationary Bar and up to Rub-ber Roller as shown.

8. Stretch the Net over entire length of Rubber Roll-er. Secure Net between Rollers by rotating Rollerno more than one revolution.

9. Rotate Rewrap Bar toward Rubber Pinch Roll andlock in place. (Dashed Position)

10. Close Shields and secure Latches before resumingoperation.

11. On the Tractor Module, perform the steps requiredto fully retract the Control Actuator as listed in theManual Quick Wrap Activation & De-activationtopic of this chapter.

QUICK WRAP OPERATION

Principle of OperationWhile operating the Baler to build the bale, the wrappingsystem is NOT operating. When the bale reaches 6″(152mm) before the predetermined size, the TractorModule Bale Size Bar Graph will flash and a single beepwill be heard. Continue baling until the Bale Size BarGraph becomes a solid line and the System beeps threetimes. Stop forward travel IMMEDIATELY and back upa few feet. After shifting the tractor to park or neutral,continue to run the PTO. The Tractor Module Go Arrowwill disappear and the “CYCLE” icon will begin toflash.

NOTE: Forward travel MUST be stopped IM-MEDIATELY to prevent the crop from being placedon the outside of the Net material.

When the wrapping cycle begins, the Electric Actuatorwill extend causing the Knife Blade Holder to rotate theBlades away from the Front Guide assembly and releasethe end of the Netting. In addition, as the Blade Holderrotates, it drives the Rubber Drive Roller by means of aone-way overrunning clutch, to advance the Nettingtowards the Feeder Belts. The Feeder Belts willsandwich the Netting between the (bale forming) Beltsand the Feeder Belts and carry the Netting toward thebale. The “CYCLE” icon will go solid. As the net isfeeding onto the bale, the one-way clutch will beoverrunning on the blade holder shaft. The last 1-1/2″(37 mm) of the Actuator stroke will cause the Pivot Plateto compress the Spring on the Brake Tension Arm. TheBrake will then increase the drag on the Drive Roll andincrease the Netting tension. There is also a Sensormounted on the right side of the Steel Drive Roll whichmeasures the amount of Netting placed on the bale.When the correct amount of Netting has been distrib-uted, the Actuator will be retracted. While the Actuatoris being retracted, the Strap (Fig. 43) will hold Springtension to maintain proper Netting tension. At the endof the Actuator retraction cycle, the Brake will bereleased, the Blade will cut and hold the Netting and the“CYCLE” icon Indicator will extinguish and the Systemwill beep twice indicating the tying cycle is completed.

NOTE: It may be necessary to back up severalfeet before ejecting the bale to allow room to closeand latch the Tailgate without contacting the cropwindrow.

The bale can now be ejected and the bale formationprocess can be restarted. As the End Gate is opened and

Page 54: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 52 Printed in U.S.A.

the bale is ejected, the “BALER” icon displays an openEnd Gate. As the End Gate is closed, the “BALER” icondisplays a closed End Gate. When the System isrecycled and ready to bale, the “BALER” icon willdisplay the Go Arrow and the System will beep once.

The Baler can be operated with either a conventionalTwine Tie system or the Quick Wrap system. For theTwine Tie system, refer to information provided in theAuto-Electric Control topic of the Operation chapter ofthis Operator’s Manual.

Wrapping The Bale

At least two complete wraps should be used for normalbaling conditions. More wraps may be required fordifferent conditions or to increase bale weatherability. Toadjust the number of wraps, depress the “+” or “–” key onthe Tractor Module. A numeric value indicating theapproximate number of wraps will appear in the displayalong with the flashing “WRAPS” icon. To increase thenumber of wraps per bale, depress the “+” key, followedby the “ENTER” key. To decrease the number of wraps perbale, depress the “–” key followed by the “ENTER” key.The amount of wraps per bale can be adjusted from 1.25to 9.75 wraps in 0.25 wrap increments.

When the bale size is changed, it WILL NOT benecessary to adjust the amount of wraps to compensatefor the change in size. The system automaticallycompensates for the changes in bale size and PTOspeed.

Use the following charts as a guide for selecting thenumber of wraps for a given crop:

Table of Recommended 1475 WrapsCrop

MaterialNumber ofWraps Per

Bale

BaleDiameterin Feet

Number ofBales Per

3,000 MeterRoll of Net

Material

Hay 2 to 2-1/25

200 to 235

Straw 2 to 2-1/45

215 to 235

Table of Recommended 1875 WrapsCrop

MaterialNumber ofWraps Per

Bale

BaleDiameterin Feet

Number ofBales Per

2,000 MeterRoll of Net

Material

Hay 2 to 2-1/26

130 to 170

Straw 2 to 2-1/46

150 to 170

Unplugging (Figs. 41 thru 45)To unplug the Quick Wrap Attachment, proceed asfollows:

1 – Adjusting Bolt (Drive Roller) Tension2 – 093457 Keep Door Closed WARNING Decal3 – Compression Spring Adjusted to 1-3/4 to 1-7/8”

(44 to 46 mm) (Pinch Roll Tension)4 – Strap

Fig. 43: Right Side Door Opened

1

3

2

4

1. Exercise the MANDATORY SAFETY SHUT-DOWN PROCEDURE (Page 10).

1 – Compression Spring Adjusted to 1-3/4 to 1-7/8”(44 to 46 mm) (Pinch Roll Tension)

2 – 093457 Keep Door Closed WARNING Decal3 – Adjusting Bolt (Drive Roller) Tension4 – Sprocket with One-Way Clutch

Fig. 44: Left Side Door Opened

1

2

3

4

2. Locate the source of the plugging. The most likelyplace to look is in the area of the Quick Wrap DriveRoller and Knife. If Netting should wrap aroundthe Rubber Drive Roller, the Actuator should be inthe fully retracted position before attempting tounwrap the Rubber Drive Roller. It is best to cutthe Netting the entire length of the Rollers. BESURE NOT to cut into or damage the RubberDrive Roller. After the Netting is cut, rotate theRubber Drive Roller by hand while pulling the cutNetting free from the Roller. It may also be neces-

Page 55: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 53 907520/CP0600

sary to remove the Knife Shield (Fig. 41) and RearGuide Assembly to access the plugged area.Check to make sure that the Chute area, betweenthe Drive Rollers and the Feeder Belts, is free fromobstructions, allowing the Netting to drop down tothe Feeder Belts. If necessary, re-install the Net-ting following the Quick Wrap Roll Installationprocedure in this chapter.

1 – Rubber Drive Roller2 – Gap Set from 1/8 to 3/16″ (4 to 5 mm)3 – Rear Guide Assembly4 – Pinch Roller5 – Front Guide Assembly6 – Chute Area

Fig. 45: Quick Wrap Unit Installed

1

2

3

4

56

3. As required, the Rear Guide Assembly should bepositioned so that a 1/8 to 3/16″ (4 to 5 mm) gapexists between the Rubber Drive Roller and theRear Guide Assembly. Then, reinstall and rese-cure all Shields in their correct positions and, ifnecessary, adjust proper Pinch Roller Compres-sion Spring tension, on both ends of the Roller, be-fore resuming operation.

IMPORTANT: When removing the wrapped(plugging) material from the Rollers, NEVER cutinto Rubber Roller or Belts with a knife. Cuts inRoller or Belts will cause more frequent wrappingproblems and necessitate Roller and/or Beltreplacement.

Material Removal From PinchRollers (Figs. 43 & 44)Perform the following steps if the Pinch Rollers becomewrapped with Netting:

1. Remove the wrapped material by gathering theends in your hand and pulling.

2. Check the Rollers for any rough edges or protru-sions and file down, if necessary.

NOTE: It may be necessary to readjust theDrive Roller Chain if the Pinch Roller tension haschanged.

3. Reroute the Net end per the detailed informationprovided in Fig. 41 and on the decal located insidethe Tailgate cover.

4. Close all Shields and secure all Latches.

EJECTING THE BALE

WARNINGBales made with the Round Baler are LARGE,CYLINDRICAL and HEAVY! When ejected ona flat surface, the momentum of the bale com-ing off the bale discharge ramps, could carrythe bale as far as 10 feet (3 m) behind the baler.On a hill or incline, this distance could bemuch farther. Serious personal injury or prop-erty damage could result if the bale is ejectedtoward a sloping surface and allowed to rollaway uncontrolled!

The following procedure should be followed, in se-quence as described, for ejecting a bale:

1. Stop the PTO (if desired) and back the Baler ashort distance away from the windrow.

NOTE: Stopping the PTO, while opening theRear Gate, will result in a neater looking bale.

2. Activate the tractor hydraulic control lever andfully extend Gate Cylinders to open Rear Gate.

3. If necessary, engage the PTO at a very low RPMand the bale will roll off the lower Rollers.

4. With the PTO running at low RPM, drive the Balerahead and close the Rear Gate by retracting theGate Cylinders.

Page 56: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 54 Printed in U.S.A.

IMPORTANT: BE SURE to fully retract the GateCylinders to allow the Gate Latches to engage andlock. The PTO should be kept running while closingthe Gate to reduce the possibility of Belt damageand to help prevent the Bale Starter from hangingup on the Belts. Before proceeding to start forminganother bale, check to see that the Bale Starter isin the “down” position.

BALE COUNTER (Fig. 46)(Manual Twine Wrap System Only)

The Manual Control Baler is provided with a BaleCounter which indicates the number of times the Gatehas been opened to discharge a bale. The Bale Counteris located behind the large Hinged Covers on the rightside of the Baler.

1 – Bale Counter

Fig. 46

OVERLOAD PROTECTIONSHEAR BOLTS (Fig. 47)

The Baler Drive Line is protected with one 1/4 x 1-1/2″Shear Bolt, sheared through the base of the Bolt Head.

On 540 RPM model Balers, replacement Grade L9, 1/4x 1-1/2″ Shear Bolts are available in packaged quantitiesof (8) per package by ordering part number 095141.

On 1000 RPM model Balers, replacement Grade 5, 1/4x 1-1/2″ Shear Bolts are available in packaged quantitiesof (8) per package by ordering part number 900084.

WARNINGALWAYS use genuine GEHL replacementservice parts to assure safe operation of theBaler.

IMPORTANT: To prevent the Pilot Shaft fromseizing, the Shear Flange MUST BE GREASEDbefore a new Shear Bolt is installed and the Baleris operated. Refer to the Lubrication chapter fordetails. BE SURE to remove the cause of theoverload before restarting the Baler.

Four extra Drive Line Shear Bolts and Lock Nuts areprovided in the Shear Bolt Holder which is locatedinside the Left Twine Box.

NOTE: Refer to the Optional Features and Ac-cessories chapter of this manual for part number toorder additional Shear Bolts.

1 – Shear Bolt head positioned to shear through Boltbody

2 – Threaded end of Shear Bolt with Lock Nut3 – Implement End of PTO

Fig. 47

1

2

3

NOTE: In order to achieve proper Bolt shearing,the Shear Bolt Must be installed so that the Boltshears through the body of the Bolt and not thethreads. See Figure 47.

Page 57: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 55 907520/CP0600

UNPLUGGING & TRASH REMOVAL(Figs. 48, 49 & 50)

If the Baler becomes plugged, the following procedureMUST be used to safely clear the Baler:

1. Back out of the windrow.

2. Disengage the tractor PTO and open the Tailgate.

3. Exercise the MANDATORY SAFETY SHUT-DOWN PROCEDURE (Page 10).

DANGERALWAYS exercise the MANDATORY SAFETYSHUTDOWN PROCEDURE before unpluggingor removing trash from the baler.

4. Lock Tailgate open by turning or depressing GateCylinder Lockout Valve (See Figs. 5 & 7).

5. Remove the Windguard. The Windguard is aquick disconnecting Guard that can be removedby pulling out and rotating the Windguard Retain-ing Lever 90°. The Windguard Retaining Lever islocated on each side of the Hitch.

6. Pull out loose material from on top of plugged ma-terial.

7. When the plug occurred, the Pickup probably con-tinued to run and balled up material on top of thePickup. Pull the material out from the underside ofthe in-going windrow between the windrow andthe Pickup.

8. When the material becomes hard to pull out/off ofthe Pickup, place the Reversing Wrench on theCross Shaft and press downwards on the Wrench(Fig. 49). This will rotate the Pickup and PackingRolls backwards, backing the material out of thepinch points between the Packing Roll and Pick-up.

9. If you have been successful in unplugging theBaler in Step 8., proceed to Step 10. Occasionallyyou may be unable to reverse the Baler by handusing the Reversing Wrench. In some cases, it willbe necessary to eject the partially completed balein order to gain access to the inside of the Baler.When this occurs, the following steps MUST befollowed:

a. Remove the Reversing Wrench and return itto its proper storage position.

b. Reconnect the PTO disconnected in Step 3.

c. Start tractor, engage PTO and eject thepartial bale that is formed in the Chamber.The partial bale can be unrolled andre–baled.

d. Again exercise the MANDATORYSAFETY SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE(Page 10).

e. With the baling chamber cleared, go underthe raised and locked Tailgate and remove asmuch material as possible from the rear ofthe Baler. Now, using a bar or long woodenpole, bump material from between thePacking Rolls, forward, toward the tractor.NEVER use your hands or feet to clear cropfrom this position.

WARNINGNEVER go under a raised tailgate without firstplacing the gate cylinder lockout valve in thelocked position. See Figs. 5 & 7 for details.

WARNINGDO NOT put your hands or feet betweenthe packing roll and lower feed roll. NEVERuse your hands or feet to dislodge cropfrom between the packing roll and lowerfeed roll. The packing roll is spring loadeddownward and will entrap you.

10. After material is unplugged from the PackingRoll/Pickup area, remove any trash that may havebuilt up on top of the belts or on top of the StarterFinger Assembly.

11. Rotate the Starter Finger Assembly upward byhand making sure that none of the Fingers makecontact with the Stripper Roll. If any of the Fin-gers touch the Stripper Roll, they MUST bestraightened BEFORE operation can continue.

12. AFTER unplugging, replace the Windguard,place the Gate Cylinder Lockout Valve in the openposition and return the Reversing Wrench to itsproper storage position.

Page 58: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 6 – Operation

907520/CP0600 56 Printed in U.S.A.

WARNINGALWAYS remove the reversing wrench fromthe cross shaft and return it to its storage BE-FORE resuming baler operation.

13. Go through the proper start-up procedure, engagetractor PTO at a low RPM and close and latch theTailgate.

NOTE: If the Baler is equipped with an Auto-Electric Control System, the “GO ARROW” iconMUST be visible on the Tractor Control Module BE-FORE baling can resume. If the “GO ARROW” iconis NOT visible, with the PTO running, open andclose the Tailgate again.

1 – Potential Area of Trash Buildup2 – Packing Roll3 – Bale Starter4 – Forming Bale5 – 16″ Floor Roll6 – 8″ Floor Roll (Lower Feedroll)7 – Stripper Roll8 – Pickup9 – Starter Finger

Fig. 48

� !

"

If obstruction is ahead of the Packing Roller but NOTwrapped on the Roller, check to see if the Pickup V-Beltis slipping and that the Windguard Tines are restrictedfrom being raised higher than the center of the PackingRoller. Also, try varying your ground and PTO speedsto find a more suitable combination for the crop beingbaled. This condition can be encountered when balingdry straw, cane or corn stalks. To improve operation inthese crops and conditions, a Packing Roller Lagging KLit is available. See the Optional Features & Accesso-ries chapter of this manual for additional information.

1 – Reversing Wrench2 – Wrench Rotation to Reverse Baler

Fig. 49

12

1 – Windguard2 – Windguard Retaining Lever3 – Windguard Stop4 – Reversing Wrench in Storage Location

Fig. 50

4

3

2

1

Page 59: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 57 907520/CP0600

CHAPTER 7ADJUSTMENTS

WARNINGBEFORE adjusting this unit, exercise theMANDATORY SAFETY SHUTDOWN PROCE-DURE (page 10).

AXLE HEIGHT (Fig. 51)

The Baler Axle height can be adjusted to four differentlevels by repositioning and/or rotating the Spindleassemblies. The factory set height shown is appropriatefor most normal field conditions. By rotating the Spindleassemblies 180°, the Baler can be lowered approximate-ly 3-3/4″ (95 mm). This setting may be useful when usinga tractor with a high drawbar ground clearance. TheBaler is shipped in the second highest possible setting.

1 – Two Bale Discharge Ramps2 – Wheel Spindle Assembly

Fig. 51

2

1

BALE DISCHARGE RAMPS (Fig. 51)

Bale Discharge Ramps are mounted to the back of theBaler Axle and provided to facilitate ejecting a formedand tied bale. To accommodate different crop and fieldconditions, the Ramps can be mounted in either of fourlocations, using the holes provided. When baling certainwet crops, it may also be necessary to remove the Rampsto facilitate ejecting the bale.

WARNINGBales made with the Round Baler are LARGE,CYLINDRICAL and HEAVY! When ejected ona flat surface, the momentum of the bale, com-ing off the bale discharge ramps, could carrythe bale as far as 10 feet (3 m) behind the baler.On a hill or incline, this distance could bemuch farther. Serious personal injury or prop-erty damage could result if the bale is ejectedtoward a sloping surface and allowed to rollaway uncontrolled!

BALE STARTER (Figs. 52 & 53)The Bale Starter device is a set of Fingers that arelocated between the Belts and behind the PackingRoller. They deflect material and keep it from comingout over the top of and wrapping on the Packing Roller,when starting a bale. The Fingers are part of a movableassembly which is held by Pivoting Links and posi-tioned by a Roller. Springs on each side of the movableassembly return the assembly to a starting position aftereach bale is ejected. The Roller rides on the Belts and ispositioned by the bale.

IMPORTANT: Before starting to form each newbale, look back at the Baler to make sure the BaleStarter Assembly has returned to its startingposition. It is possible that material which iswedged in the Links and worn Pivot Bushings orbent linkages can cause the Starter to hang up.

1 – Belts2 – Bale Starter Assembly (Toward Front of Baler)3 – Scraper

Fig. 52

2

3

1

Page 60: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

907520/CP0600 58 Printed in U.S.A.

1 – Bale Starter Fingers

Fig. 53

1

BELT GUARD (Fig. 54)The Front Belt Guard should be maintained at a positionof 1/8 to 1/4″ (3 to 6 mm) away from the Belts.

1 – Belt Guard2 – Belts

Fig. 54

1 2

WARNINGNEVER operate the baler unless the front beltguard is in place and properly adjusted.

CHAIN IDLERS (Fig. 55)The Baler has only one adjustable Spring-loaded Idlerwhich is located on the Roller Drive. This adjustment isprovided to compensate for normal Chain wear. TheIdler tension should be checked after every 50 hours ofoperation and readjusted, when required. The Idlertension is controlled by a Compression Spring that isadjusted to a length of 6-3/4 to 8″ (172 to 203 mm). Aclearance of 2″ (51 mm) between the Mounting Bracketand the Spring Guide Head must also be maintained.

1 – 6-3/4 to 8″ (172 to 203 mm) Compressed SpringLength

2 – 2″ (51 mm) Exposed Spring Guide Length

Fig. 55

The remaining Chain Drives have spring loaded idlersthat are not adjustable.

GATE LATCH LIFT RODS (Fig. 56)

To properly adjust the Gate Latch Lift Rods on eitherside of the Gate, simply close the Gate and adjust theposition of the nut on each Rod so that, with the GateHooks resting on the Locking pins, there is a 1/16″ (1.5mm) clearance between the Nuts and Barrel Spacers oneach side of the Gate. Then, open the Gate and close itagain to check for correct latching; readjust if necessary.For additional information, refer to the following GateStop topic.

1 – Gate Latch Rod2 – Barrel Spacer3 – Nut-to-Spacer Clearance of 1/16″ (1.5 mm)4 – Left Gate Latch

Fig. 56

1

2

3

4

Page 61: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

Printed in U.S.A. 59 907520/CP0600

GATE STOPS (Fig. 57)

The position of the Gate Stops, which are located oneach side of the Baler Frame, can be adjusted by addingor removing Shims. Gate Stop adjustment is onlyrequired if some of the Gate components have beenreplaced. If necessary, shim each side so that, with theGate closed, the Gate Latches are ahead of the LatchPins by a measured distance of 1/8″ (3 mm).

1 – Gate Stop Adjustment Shims

Fig. 57

1

NOTE: After Gate Stops have been adjusted, itmay also be necessary to readjust the Gate EndRoller position. Refer back to the Gate End Rollertopic in the next paragraph.

GATE END ROLLER (Fig. 58)

The Gate End Roller can be adjusted by means of the1/2″ Bolts (3 for 1475 or 2 for 1875) and (1) 5/16″ Bolton each side of the Gate. The 1/2″ Bolts are installed inslots and the 5/16″ Bolt can be positioned in any one ofa series of holes to vary the position of the Roller. TheRoller should be adjusted and maintained at a positionof 1/2 to 1″ (13 to 25 mm) from the 16″ Lower DriveRoller. This distance should be increased to 1 to 1-1/2″(25 to 38 mm) for Balers with the Quick Wrap.

NOTE: The Tailgate MUST be tight against thestops before making adjustment. (See Fig. 57)

IMPORTANT: BE SURE that the Roller is set tothe same position on both sides of the Gate, asdetermined by the 5/16″ Bolt pattern. Also, BESURE that the Right and Left Gate End RollerSupport Arms are kept parallel to each other toinsure proper Belt tracking.

1 – Gate End Roller Adjustment Bolts2 – Lower Belt Guide3 – End Roller4 – Right Support Arm5 – Gate Latch

Fig. 58

1

2

3

4

5

OVERRUNNING CLUTCHSPROCKET (Fig. 59)The Scraper Roller Overrunning Clutch Sprocketassembly gives positive drive to the Roller whileallowing for slight differences in the Roller and Beltspeeds. To check for freedom of rotation, with the Balerempty, shuttle locks engaged, and Baler disconnectedfrom the tractor, use a 3/4″ wrench and rotate the capscrew clockwise. The Overrunning Clutch should rotatewithout rotating any of the other drives. The Clutch isa self-contained unit and can be removed by removingthe retaining cap screw.

NOTE: If the Clutch needs to be removed, blockGears on the opposite side of the Baler with a blockof wood.

PACKING ROLLER CLEARANCE(Figs. 59 & 62)The purpose of the Packing Roller is to compress thematerial which is entering between it and the 8″ LowerRoller. The Packing Roller is spring-loaded and drivenfrom the left side of the machine. Clearance between thelower 8″ Roller and the Packing Roller should be set at1/4″ (6 mm). This setting is made with the 1/2″ Bolts onthe end of the Packing Roller Roll Arms on both sidesof the Baler. This clearance should be checked on aroutine basis every 100 hours. The Packing RollerTension Spring lengths, on both sides of the machine,should be set to 9″ (229 mm). For lighter, fluffier crops,the clearance should be opened up and the spring tensionshould be reduced.

Page 62: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

907520/CP0600 60 Printed in U.S.A.

1 – Scraper Roller Overrunning ClutchSprocket Assembly

2 – Packing Roller Arm 1/2″ Adjustment Bolt3 – Scraper Roller Overrunning Clutch Retaining

Cap Screw

Fig. 59

1

2

3

IMPORTANT: The Spring which places tensionon the Packing Roller is guided by a Rod with athreaded end. The threads are provided to enableSpring installation in a compressed state. Makesure that the Nut on the threaded Rod is NOTholding the Packing Roller open which could resultin damage to the Spring Bracket.

PICKUP (Fig. 60)

The Baler Pickup should be run as high off the groundas possible while still being able to completely pick upall of the crop. A Hand Crank is provided to raise andlower the Pickup. If a Hydraulic Lift Kit is installed, thelower limit of the Pickup is controlled by the HandCrank. To set clearance, lower the Hand Crank andHydraulic Lift Cylinder all the way. Set groundclearance with the manual Hand Crank. The Pickupheight can also be adjusted by repositioning the LiftRods (Fig. 63) into a different hole location. Thisadjustment may be required if the axle and HitchTongue have been positioned in the extreme higher orlower position.

NOTE: The Hand Crank setting overrides theHydraulic Lift Cylinder if the Lift Cylinder is re-tracted.

NOTE: The Pickup is raised by turning the HandCrank in a clockwise direction and lowered by turn-ing the Hand Crank in a counterclockwise direc-tion.

1

1 – Pickup Lift Hand Crank

Fig. 60

PICKUP FLOTATION SPRING (Fig.61)The Pickup Flotation Spring is located on the front rightside of the Baler. The flotation is set at the factory for aBaler not equipped with Crowder Wheels. The Exten-sion Spring should be stretched to 11″ (280 mm) Hookto Hook when the Pickup is in the “up” position.

If Crowder Wheels are added to the Baler, it will benecessary to increase the spring tension to achieve thedesired Pickup flotation.

1

1 – Pickup Flotation Spring

Fig. 61

PICKUP DRIVE (Fig. 62)The Pickup is driven by a V-Belt from the 8″ LowerRoller. The Belt Drive will slip in the event of an

Page 63: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

Printed in U.S.A. 61 907520/CP0600

overload. Spring tension on the Idler can be changed byrepositioning the Spring Hooks and adjusting theBracket on the lower back end of the Spring.

NOTE: V-Belt wear and stretching should bechecked on a periodic basis to avoid affectingOverfill Clutch mechanism operation.

1 – Overfill Clutch Mechanism Activator2 – Right Frame3 – Keyed Sprocket4 – Density Cylinder Loading Chain5 – Adjustable Relief Valve6 – Pressure Gauge7 – Pickup Drive V-Belt8 – Packing Roller Arm 1/2″ Adjustment Bolt9 – Pickup Drive Tension Spring

10 – Idler Arm11 – 3/8″ Hexagon Nut12 – Overfill Clutch Cable

Fig. 62

1 2 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

Overfill Clutch (Fig. 62)The Overfill Clutch mechanism is linked to the PickupDrive and serves to protect the Baler if it becomes filledbeyond design capacity. Readjustment of the Clutchmechanism may be required due to stretching of theV-Belt or Overfill Clutch linkage Cable. To make theadjustment, first make sure the Pickup is set to itsoperating height. Then, loosen the 3/8″ Hexagon Nutwhich clamps the Cable to the Pickup V-Belt Idler Arm.Pull on the Cable until the Idler moves and backs offslightly and then retighten the Nut.

Check to see if the Overfill Clutch linkage Cable is tooloose by pulling down on the Cable at the upper rear ofthe Baler. The Cable, when pulled down, should deflectdownward less than 2″ (51 mm) from the Frame channelbefore the Pickup V-Belt Idler has started to move away

from the V-Belt. If deflection is more than 2″ (51 mm),readjust Cable clamping point. Cable tension should bechecked on a routine basis every 50 hours of operation.

IMPORTANT: Excessive Cable tension willmean inadequate V-Belt tension and result inexcessive V-Belt wear and Pickup slippage. Toolittle Cable tension will cause the Overfill Clutch tomalfunction and thus NOT protect the Baler. Thefirst bale made, after the Overfill Clutchmechanism is adjusted, should be observed in itsfinal stages with a cautious eye to insure that themechanism is functioning properly.

WINDGUARD (Fig. 63)The Windguard for the Pickup has a Limit Stopadjustment. The Limit Stop adjustment consists of two5/8″ Hexagon Head Cap Screws located on either sideof the hitch frame. The Cap Screws are used to set theupper limits of Windguard travel. Normal settings willrestrict the Windguard Tines from being raised anyhigher than the center of the Packing Roller.

WARNINGNEVER operate the baler unless the wind-guard is in place and properly adjusted.

1 – Windguard2 – Limit Stop Adjustment (each side of Hitch Frame)3 – Windguard Latch4 – Lift Rod

Fig. 63

1

2

34

SCRAPER (Figs. 52 & 64)The Lower Drive (Scraper) Roller for the Belts isprovided with an adjustable full-width Scraper to helpprevent material build-up on the Roller. The ScraperMUST be set close to enable full-width cleaning. To

Page 64: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

907520/CP0600 62 Printed in U.S.A.

adjust the Scraper Blade, loosen the 5/16″ attachinghardware on the bottom of the Blade. Then, tap the Bladeinto contact with a 1/16″ (1.5 mm) piece of shim stockagainst the Roller. Then, tightly secure the 5/16″hardware. The Blade itself will wear and may requirereplacement after a period of extended Baler use.Contact your GEHL dealer for the replacement Bladepart number.

IMPORTANT: Inspect the Scraper adjustmenton a routine basis every 50 hours of operation. Ifthe Scraper is NOT adjusted correctly, material willbuild up on the Roller and cause excessivehorsepower requirements.

1 – Lower Drive Roller2 – 5/16″ Scraper Blade Attaching Hardware3 – Scraper4 – Front Of Baler

Fig. 64

��

SHUTTLE STOPS (Fig. 65)

1 – Belt Shuttle2 – Shuttle Lock3 – Right Side Shuttle Stop Adjustment Bolt

(One Each Side)

Fig. 65: Shuttle Lock in “Storage” Position

1

2

3

In certain short or very dry straws or grass conditions,bale starting may be improved by slackening the Beltsduring the core formation stage. The Shuttle Stops areprovided to enable slackening the Belts, when required.Rotate the Shuttle Stop Bolt on each end of the Shuttleassembly equally to move the Shuttle rearward. 1″(25 mm) of rearward Shuttle movement results inapproximately 4″ (102 mm) of slack in the Belts.

SQUARING BELT SHUTTLE(Figs. 62 & 65)It is essential that the Belt Shuttle be square with theBaler Frame and the Belt Tracking Roller be properlyadjusted (per topic titled “Belt Tracking & Alignment”)so that the Belts track evenly. To check for Shuttlesquareness, measure from a crossmember on the topfront of the Baler to the right and left end of one of theShuttle Roller Tubes. To square the Belt Shuttle, havethe Baler empty and the Rear Gate closed. Adjustsquareness with the Bolt on the left end of the Shuttle.If the Adjustment Bolt will NOT square the Belt Shuttle,it will be necessary to change the Index position of theKeyed Sprockets that connect the left and right DensityCylinder Loading Chains. Use the following procedurefor adjustment:

1. Determine the direction in which the CylinderLoading Chain needs to be adjusted. Rememberthat the two Sprockets for the Chain tension arekeyed to a common Shaft.

2. Depressurize the TDC system. Fully loosen or re-move the Valve Stem located on top of the Reser-voir. DO NOT retighten until ready to pressurize.

3. Remove the Trip Spacer from the Cylinder TripArm. This is done to prevent accidental actuationof the Valve Trip Mechanism (covered later in thischapter).

4. Advance the No. 60 Cylinder Loading Chain thenecessary amount and readjust belt to squareShuttle.

5. Replace and/or tighten Valve Stem and pressurizeto 140-150 PSI (980–1050 kPa).

6. Replace the Trip Spacer on the Trip Arm. Checkto make sure that it will contact the spring loadedValve Trip Mechanism when baling resumes.

Page 65: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

Printed in U.S.A. 63 907520/CP0600

TWINE TIE SYSTEM

Twine Placement (Figs. 66 & 67)

To adjust twine placement on the left-hand side of theBaler:

1. Extend the Actuator until the Twine Arm ap-proaches the left side.

2. Loosen the Jam Nut on the Stop Bolt located onthe left side of the Twine Tie Frame Assembly.

3. Extend the Stop Bolt to stop the Twine Arm closerto the center of the bale and retract the Stop Boltto allow the Twine arm to travel closer to the leftside of the bale.

4. Secure the adjustment by tightening the Jam Nut.

1 – Stop Plate2 – Stop Bolt3 – Jam Nut

Fig. 66: Viewed from bottom of Baler

1

2

3

Twine Tail Length (Fig. 67)

To change the length of the twine tails, adjust the JamNuts on the end of the Spring Slide Rod. Losening theadjustment lengthens the tails and tightening theadjustment shortens the tails.

NOTE: It is possible to loosen the Jam Nuts sofar that the Clamp Jaws will not clamp twine. VerifyClamp Jaw operation before resuming baling.

1 – Jam Nuts on End of Spring Slide Rod2 – Actuator Fully Extended3 – Twine Arm4 – End Wrap Pause Switch Trip Bracket (Automatic

Bale Control Models Only, Early Style)5 – End Wrap Pause Switch Assembly (Automatic

Bale Control Models Only, Early Style)

Fig. 67: Viewed from bottom of Baler

1 2

3 4 5

Twine Tension (Fig. 68)(Manual & Automatic Twine Balers)The twine tensioning device is located on either side ofthe bale behind the front side doors. To increase thetwine tension, rotate the insulator so the twine routefollows a “Z” shaped path.

1 – Least Tension2 – Medium Tension3 – Maximum Tension

Fig. 68

� �

Clamp Jaws (Figs. 67 & 69)

Latch Position

To properly adjust the Clamp Jaw Latch position:

5. Fully extend the Actuator. Then, adjust the SpringSlide Rod so the Clamp Jaw Pivot Rod rotates be-low the Catch on the Trip assembly. When thisposition is obtained, tighten the Jam Nuts.

Page 66: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

907520/CP0600 64 Printed in U.S.A.

Latch Tension

To adjust the Clamp Jaw Latch tension:

6. Rotate the Lock Nut on the Clamp Jaw Pivot Rod.The tighter the Spring is compressed, the greaterthe tension on the twine. Adjust the Spring to alength of 1-1/2″ (38 mm).

1 – Twine Knife2 – Clamp Jaw Latch3 – Lock Nut on End of Clamp Jaw Pivot Rod4 – Clamp Jaw in Open Position5 – This Flat Jaw Edge First with Plastic Twine

Fig. 69

1

2

3

4 5

NOTE: It may be desirable to install ClampJaws with the flat edge up if problems occur usingplastic twine.

Manually Opening Clamp Jaws (Fig. 69)

At times, it may be necessary to open the Clamp Jawsto insert or clear the twine. To open the Jaws, place a 3/4″box or open end wrench on the two 1/2″ Jam Nuts on theClamp Jaw Pivot Rod and turn. Figure 69 shows an earlyproduction Clamp Jaw Pivot Rod with a single LockNut.

BALE FORMING BELTS

Tension Adjustment (Figs. 54 & 62)

The tension of the Belts and subsequent bale density iscontrolled by the hydraulic TDC system. Belt tensioncan be varied by changing the Relief Valve pressuresetting. Belt tension and bale density is increased byturning the Valve Cartridge End Disc clockwise into theCartridge. To obtain the proper setting, rotate the EndDisc clockwise all the way in, then back it off 2 turns.To fix this setting, rotate the Locking Ring clockwiseuntil it is tight against the Valve Body.

Tracking & Alignment(Figs. 62, 70 & 71)

1 – Belt Guides2 – Belt Tracking Roller3 – Belts4 – Rear Gate Belt Guide5 – Retainer Mounting Bolts (2 Each Side)

Fig. 70

2

1 3

4

5

When the Baler is manufactured, Belt tracking is set atthe factory. This setting, however, may require adjust-ment after the paint is worn off and the Belts are brokenin. After the Baler has made at least 50 bales, adjust Belttracking in the following manner:

1. Make sure Shuttle is square and Tailgate is closedand latched. Take note first, as the bale is forming,if all of the Belts tend to travel to one side. If theydo, form the next bale to about half-size and stopbaling. After exercising the MANDATORYSAFETY SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE (page10), reposition the Belt Tracking Roller. Makesure that, before proceeding, the half-size bale isuniform and NOT barrel or cone-shaped. Then, bya test and readjust process, reposition the TrackingRoller until all of the Belts are NO longer rubbingon the Belt Guides; lowering the right side of theRoller will cause the Belts to travel to the left. Af-ter each 1/8″ (3 mm) of Roller repositioning ismade, tighten the Retainer hardware and watchhow the Belts are tracking through at least 3 com-plete revolutions of the belts before stopping op-eration and continuing to readjust the Roller posi-tion.

Page 67: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

Printed in U.S.A. 65 907520/CP0600

2. Interchanging Belt positions may also improveBelt tracking. This process, however, is somewhatmore difficult since it requires removing the Beltsfrom the Baler in order to change Belt positionsrouted through the Belt Guide and around ap-propriate Rollers.

NOTE: Improper bale formation may give an er-roneous indication of faulty belt tracking. See “BaleFormation” topic in the Operation chapter for de-tails.

1 – Trailing End2 – Leading End3 – Outside Lacing Hook4 – Direction of Belt Travel5 – Lacing Pin

Fig. 71

� �

NOTE: Whenever Belt Lacings are uncoupled,BE SURE to re–couple the Belt so the end with ex-tra Hooks stays on the leading end as illustrated.

Rear Gate Belt Guide(Figs. 70, 73 & 74)

To help improve Belt tracking, both model Balers areprovided with a Rear Gate Belt Guide. The mountingposition of the 1475 Belt Guide is fixed (non-adjust-able). The 1875 Belt Guide is mounted in slotted holes.Therefore, the Belt Guide can be adjusted and securedin a position from 1/16 to 1/4″ (1.5–6 mm) away fromthe Belts as shown.

1 – Belt Guide2 – Left Gate Roll Arm3 – Existing 5/16″ Mounting Bolt (Each Side)4 – Existing 1/2″ Mounting Hardware (each Side)

Fig. 72: RB1475 Rear Gate Belt Guide

��

1 – Belt Guide2 – Position Belt Guide 1/16 to 1/4″ (1.5–6 mm)

Away from Belt3 – Existing 1/2″ Mounting Hardware (each Side)4 – Left Gate Roll Arm

Fig. 73: RB1875 Rear Gate Belt Guide

� �

VALVE TRIP MECHANISM (Fig. 74)The Valve Trip Mechanism can be used to independent-ly adjust the air pressure controlled bale core diameter.To increase the softer core diameter adjust the TripSpacer to a lower hole.

NOTE: For additional details on the advantagesof making a Trip Arm or Trip Mechanism adjust-ment, refer to the Bale Formation & Storage Tipstopic in the Operation chapter.

Page 68: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

907520/CP0600 66 Printed in U.S.A.

1 – Trip Spacer2 – Trip Arm3 – Valve Trip Assembly4 – Valve Trip Mechanism

Fig. 74

1

23 4

AUTOMATIC TWINE WRAP SYSTEMSWITCH ADJUSTMENTS

Bale Size Adjustment (AfterSN25000–1475 & SN17900–1875)(Fig. 75)While a bale is forming in the bale chamber, the ShuttleChain (4) causes the Cylinder Rod (3) to extend. As thebale approaches full size, the Magnet (2) comes close tothe Sensor Assembly (1). This closes the Sensor Switchcontacts and starts the bale tie sequence.

The size of the bale is determined by the position of theMagnet in the slotted Bracket (5). To make largerdiameter bales, loosen the Knurled Nut on the Magnetand slide the Magnet downward in the slot. Then tightenthe Nut.

Bale Size Sensor to Magnet GapAdjustment – Early Style BalersONLY (Fig. 76)While a bale is forming in the bale chamber, the ShuttleChain (7) causes the Density Cylinder Rod (5) to extend.As the bale approaches full size, the Magnet (1) attachedto the Cylinder Rod comes close to the Bale Size SensorAssembly (2). This closes the Switch contacts and startsthe bale tie sequence.

If the tie sequence does not begin automatically whenthe bale chamber is full, it may be necessary to adjust thegap between the Bale Size Sensor (2) and the Magnet(1). To adjust the gap to factory specifications (3), eitherinstall field fabricated shims between the Sensor andMounting Bracket (4) or slightly bend the Sensor andMagnet Mounting Brackets as necessary.

1 – Sensor Assembly2 – Magnet3 – Left Side Density Cylinder Rod4 – Shuttle Chain5 – Slide

Fig. 75: Bale Size Adjustment Detailfor the Following Balers:RB1475 – After SN25000RB1875 – After SN17900

1

3

2

4

5

Bale Size Adjustment – Early StyleBalers ONLY (Fig. 77)

The size of the bale is determined by the position of theBale Size Sensor (2) in the slotted Bracket (1). To makelarger diameter bales, slide the Sensor upward in theslot.

Page 69: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

Printed in U.S.A. 67 907520/CP0600

1 – Magnet2 – Sensor Assembly3 – 3/16–3/8 inch (5–10 mm)4 – Sensor Mounting Bracket5 – Left Density Cylinder Rod (Shown fully extended

as it would be when a bale is ready for tying)6 – Shuttle (Shown all the way toward rear of Baler –

where it would be when a bale is ready for tying)7 – Shuttle Chain

Fig. 76: : Early Style Auto Twine System BaleSize Sensor-to-Magnet Gap Setting

1

3

2

6

5

4 7

1 – Mounting Bracket

Fig. 77: Bale Size Adjustment Detailfor the Following Balers:

RB1475 – After SN24715 & Before SN25001RB1875 – After SN17675 & Before SN17901

1 2

1

2

A

A

View A–A

2 – Bale Size Switch Assembly

Page 70: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

907520/CP0600 68 Printed in U.S.A.

Tailgate Switch (Fig. 78)

1. When the Tailgate is latched, the Magnet will berotated away from the Switch and the Switchshould be in the open mode.

2. When the Tailgate is unlatched, the magnet willswing alongside the end of the switch. The end ofthe Magnet must be positioned 1/16 to 3/32″ (1.6to 2.4 mm) from the Switch to cause it to close. Tomove the Magnet, loosen the Clamp, slide theMagnet to the correct position and retighten theClamp.

1 – 1/16 to 3/32″ (1.6 to 2.4 mm) Clearance2 – Magnet3 – Switch4 – Clamp

Fig. 78: Tailgate & End Wrap/Pause SwitchMagnet Adjustment

� �

NOTE: The holes for mounting the TailgateSwitch are slotted. When installing a new Switch,make sure the Switch is positioned so that one endof it is near the Magnet as shown in Fig. 78.

3. Check the continuity of the Switch (using an ohm-meter or equivalent) by placing the tester leads oneach terminal lead from the Switch. As the Mag-net approaches the Switch, the Switch shouldclose.

End Wrap Pause Switch (AfterSN24000-1475 & SN17500-1875)

Magnet to Switch Adjustment (Fig. 79)

The distance between the Switch and Magnet must be1/8 to 3/16″ (3.2 to 4.8 mm). To adjust, loosen the HexNut on the Magnet Mounting Bracket. Slide the Magnetup or down to obtain the correct distance and retightenthe Hex Nut.

Switch Placement Adjustment (Fig. 79)

The Pause Switch must be positioned on the Twine TieFrame so that the Cam/Pause Plate will pass midwaybetween the Switch and Magnet. To adjust, loosen thetwo 5/16 Cap Screws and Hex Nuts on the SwitchMounting Bracket. Move the Bracket to obtain thecorrect position and tighten the hardware.

Righthand End Wrap Twine PlacementAdjustment (Figs. 79 & 80)

To adjust the placement of the right hand end wraps:

1. Manually swing the Twine Arm to the desiredposition for placing wraps on the bale.

2. Loosen the 5/16 Hex Nut and Carriage Bolt whichsecures the Cam/Pause Plate to the bottom of theActuator Arm Assembly.

NOTE: When looking up at the End Wrap Cam/Pause Plate from the bottom of the Baler, move thePlate counterclockwise to place twine closer to theedge of the bale or clockwise to place twine furtherinward from edge of bale. The factory sets the lead-ing edge of the Plate at 1.1� (28 mm) from the Ac-tuator Arm. This setting will place the twine atapproximately 4� (102 mm) from the edge of thebale (Refer to Fig. 80, Ref. 6).

3. Rotate the Cam/Pause Plate so that the Platepasses between the Magnet and Switch.

4. Tighten the 5/16 Hex Nut.

1 – 1/8 to 3/16″ (3.2 to 4.8 mm) Clearance2 – Magnet3 – Hex Nut4 – Switch5 – Cam/Pause Plate6 – 5/16 Cap Screws, Plain Washers and Hex Nuts

Fig. 79: End Wrap Pause Switch MagnetAdjustment

�!

Page 71: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

Printed in U.S.A. 69 907520/CP0600

1 – Magnet2 – Switch3 – Cam/Pause Plate (Move Counterclockwise to

Place Twine Closer to Edge of Bale)4 – 5/16 Carriage Bolt, Plain Washer and Hex Nut5 – Actuator Arm Assembly6 – Factory Setting - 1.1� (28 mm)

Fig. 80: Cam/Pause Plate PositionAdjustment (As Viewed Looking Up from

Bottom of Baler)

��

!

AUTOMATIC BALE CONTROLSYSTEM SWITCH ADJUSTMENTS

Tailgate Switch (Fig. 81)

1. When the Tailgate is latched, the Magnet will berotated away from the Switch and the Switchshould be in the open mode.

2. When the Tailgate is unlatched, the magnet willswing alongside the end of the switch. The end ofthe Magnet must be positioned 1/16 to 3/32″ (1.6to 2.4 mm) from the Switch to cause it to close. Tomove the Magnet, loosen the Clamp, slide theMagnet to the correct position and retighten theClamp.

NOTE: The holes for mounting the TailgateSwitch are slotted. When installing a new Switch,make sure the Switch is positioned so that one endof it is near the Magnet as shown in Fig. 81.

3. Check the continuity of the Switch (using an ohm-meter or equivalent) by placing the tester leads oneach terminal lead from the Switch. As the Mag-net approaches the Switch, the Switch shouldclose.

1 – 1/16 to 3/32″ (1.6 to 2.4 mm) Clearance2 – Magnet3 – Switch4 – Clamp

Fig. 81: Tailgate & End Wrap/Pause SwitchMagnet Adjustment

� �

Friction Block Drag (Fig. 82)The Friction Block clamps to the Hub of the Sprocketand is to create 3 to 4 in-lbs (0.34–0.45 Nm) of drag asthe Friction Block rides on the Sprocket Hub. To adjustthe amount of drag, tighten or loosen the Bolt and LockNut.

1 – Drag Adjusting Bolt and Lock Nut

Fig. 82

Bale Size Indicator Sensor (Fig. 83)The distance between the input end of the Sensor and thetip of the Sprocket Tooth is to be 0.10 to 0.12″ (2.5 to3 mm). To adjust, loosen the Jam Nuts on either side ofthe Sensor Mounting Bracket, move the Sensor to thecorrect position and tighten both Jam Nuts against theMounting Bracket. DO NOT overtighten the Nuts onthe plastic threads.

NOTE: Moving the Sensor too close to or too farfrom the Sprocket Tooth will cause poor bale sizecount signals.

Page 72: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

907520/CP0600 70 Printed in U.S.A.

1 – Distance between input end of sensorand tip of the sprocket tooth is .100 to .120″(2.5 to 3 mm)

Fig. 83

End Wrap Pause Switch (BeforeSN24001-1475 & SN17501-1875)

Magnet to Switch Adjustment

1. Switch to “MANUAL” mode and extend the TwineArm until it is straight back. The cylindrical Mag-net (2) on the Switch Assembly will rotate towardthe Pause Switch (1). The end of the Magnet mustbe within 1/16 to 3/32″ (1.6 to 2.4 mm) from theend of the Switch. To adjust, loosen the Nut (3) tomove the Magnet to the proper position and tightenthe Nut.

1 – Pause Switch2 – Cylindrical Magnet

Fig. 84: Pause Switch Assembly

3 – Hex Nut4 – Connector

32

1

4

2. Disconnect the Pause Switch from the Wiring Har-ness at the Connector (4). Then, using an ohmmeter(or equivalent), check the Switch continuity byplacing the test leads across the Connector termi-nals. Whenever the Magnet is close to the Switch,the Switch should close (have continuity).

Righthand End Wrap TwinePlacement Adjustment

1. Switch to “MANUAL” mode and extend the TwineArm until it is at the desired location for applyingtwine to the righthand side of the bale.

2. Disconnect the Pause Switch from the Wiring Har-ness at the Connector (Fig. 84, Ref. 4). Using anohmmeter (or equivalent), check the Switch conti-nuity by placing the test leads across the Connectorterminals.

3. Loosen the hardware (Fig. 85, Ref. 1) which se-cures the Trip Bracket (Ref. 2) to the Twine Arm.

4. Slide the Trip Bracket away from the Switch As-sembly so that the Switch is “closed” (has continu-ity).

5. Slowly slide the Trip Bracket toward the Push Le-ver (Ref. 3) until the Lever raises and the Switchjust “opens” (has no continuity). Then, tighten thehardware which secures the Trip Bracket to theTwine Arm.

This is the setting that will cause the the Twine Arm torepeatedly pause and apply end wraps to the right sideof the bale. To check this adjustment, proceed asfollows:

6. Switch to “MANUAL” mode and extend the TwineArm until it is beyond the desired End Wrap posi-tion.

Page 73: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

Printed in U.S.A. 71 907520/CP0600

7. Disconnect the Pause Switch from the Wiring Har-ness at the Connector (Fig. 84, Ref. 4). Using anohmmeter (or equivalent), check the Switch conti-nuity by placing the test leads across the Connectorterminals. The Switch should be “closed” (havecontinuity).

8. Retract the Twine Arm (move it toward the HOMEposition) until the Switch just “opens” (has no con-tinuity). The Twine Arm should now be at the de-sired position for applying the right End Wraps. Ifit is NOT correct, repeat Steps 1 through 5.

Clearance Between End WrapPause Switch and Twine ArmAdjustmentClearance between the Push Lever (Ref. 3) and the tube

portion of the Twine Arm should be approximately 1/8″(3.2 mm) as shown in Fig. 85, Ref.4.

To adjust:

1. Loosen the hardware securing the Switch Assem-bly to the Twine Frame.

2. Slide the Switch Assembly up or down to obtainthe required clearance.

3. Tighten the hardware.

1 – Trip Bracket Mounting Hardware (2 places)2 – Trip Bracket

Fig. 85

213

4

3 – Push Lever4 – Approximately 1/8″ (3.2 mm) Clearance

End Wrap Pause Switch (AfterSN24000-1475 & SN17500-1875)Magnet to Switch Adjustment (Fig. 86)The distance between the Switch and Magnet must be1/8 to 3/16″ (3.2 to 4.8 mm). To adjust, loosen the HexNut on the Magnet Mounting Bracket. Slide the Magnetup or down to obtain the correct distance and retightenthe Hex Nut.

Switch Placement Adjustment (Fig. 86)

The Pause Switch must be positioned on the Twine TieFrame so that the Cam/Pause Plate will pass midwaybetween the Switch and Magnet. To adjust, loosen thetwo 5/16 Cap Screws and Hex Nuts on the Switch

Page 74: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

907520/CP0600 72 Printed in U.S.A.

Mounting Bracket. Move the Bracket to obtain thecorrect position and tighten the hardware.

Righthand End Wrap Twine PlacementAdjustment (Figs. 86 & 87)

To adjust the placement of the right hand end wraps:

1. Manually swing the Twine Arm to the desiredposition for placing wraps on the bale.

2. Loosen the 5/16 Hex Nut and Carriage Bolt whichsecures the Cam/Pause Plate to the bottom of theActuator Arm Assembly.

NOTE: When looking up at the End Wrap Cam/Pause Plate from the bottom of the Baler, move thePlate counterclockwise to place twine closer to theedge of the bale or clockwise to place twine furtherinward from edge of bale. The factory sets the lead-ing edge of the Plate at 1.1� (28 mm) from the Ac-tuator Arm. This setting will place the twine atapproximately 4� (102 mm) from the edge of thebale (Refer to Fig. 87, Rf. 6).

3. Rotate the Cam/Pause Plate so that the Platepasses between the Magnet and Switch.

4. Tighten the 5/16 Hex Nut.

1 – 1/8 to 3/16″ (3.2 to 4.8 mm) Clearance2 – Magnet3 – Hex Nut4 – Switch5 – Cam/Pause Plate6 – 5/16 Cap Screws, Plain Washers and Hex Nuts

Fig. 86: End Wrap Pause Switch MagnetAdjustment

�!

1 – Magnet2 – Switch3 – Cam/Pause Plate (Move Counterclockwise to

Place Twine Closer to Edge of Bale)4 – 5/16 Carriage Bolt, Plain Washer and Hex Nut5 – Actuator Arm Assembly6 – Factory Setting - 1.1� (28 mm)

Fig. 87: Cam/Pause Plate PositionAdjustment (As Viewed Looking Up from

Bottom of Baler)

��

!

Shuttle Return Switch (Fig. 88)(After SN25000-1475 &SN17900-1875)

1 – Sensor Assembly2 – Overfill Magnet3 – Cylinder Rod4 – Shuttle Chain5 – Slide6 – Shuttle Return Magnet7 – Nominal Factory Settings of 16-1/4″ (413 mm) for

1475 & 22-1/2″ (572 mm) for 1875

Fig. 88

!

Page 75: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

Printed in U.S.A. 73 907520/CP0600

When the shuttle is fully returned and the TDC cylindersare retracted, the Shuttle Return Magnet must beadjusted so that the Magnet is centered opposite of theSensor Assembly. To adjust, loosen the Knurled Nut onthe Magnet and slide the Magnet opposite the Sensor inthe slot. Then tighten the Nut.

NOTE: As the belts stretch, the TDC cylindersshould be able to retract further without being re-stricted by the Shuttle Return Magnet Assembly.Additional adjustment may be required.

While a bale is forming in the bale chamber, the ShuttleChain causes the Cylinder Rod to extend. As the baleapproaches full size, the Overfill Magnet comes close tothe Sensor Assembly and closes the Sensor Switchcontacts and starts the wrapping cycle. The Magnet isdesigned to only act as overfill protection as bale size isgoverned by the Bale Size Sensor (see Fig. 83). TheOverfill Magnet Assembly should be adjusted so thatthe wrapping system will start before the Pickupdeclutches. This setting is nominally set at the factory to16-1/4″ (413 mm) for the 1475 and 22-1/2″ (572 mm)for the 1875 between the Overfill Magnet Assembly andthe Shuttle Return Switch. Driving conditions and cropconditions may require adjusting this setting to time thewrapping system ahead of the Pickup Declutch.

The Magnet is adjusted by its placement in the slottedSlide. To make larger diameter bales, loosen theKnurled Nut on the Overfill Magnet and slide theMagnet downward in the slot. Then tighten the Nut.

Shuttle Return Switch (Fig. 89)(Before SN25001-1475 &SN17901-1875)When the shuttle is fully returned and the TDC cylindersare retracted, the Clamp/Magnet Assembly must be sliddown the square tube until tight against the ShuttleReturn Switch Assembly. The Clamp/Magnet Assem-bly should be tightened onto the tube so that it can be slidalong the tube with 4 lbs. of force, but not vibrate or slidedown the tube while the TDC cylinder is extended.

NOTE: As the belts stretch, the TDC cylindersshould be able to retract further without being re-stricted by the Clamp/Magnet Assembly.

The Spacer Magnet Assembly is designed to start thewrapping system at the maximum bale size conditionand act as an overfill protection. The Spacer MagnetAssembly should be adjusted so that the wrappingsystem will start before the Pickup declutches. Thissetting is nominally set at the factory to 16-1/4″ (413

mm) for the 1475 and 22-1/2″ (572 mm) for the 1875between the Spacer Magnet Assembly and the ShuttleReturn Switch. Driving conditions and crop conditionsmay require adjusting this setting to time the wrappingsystem ahead of the Pickup Declutch.

To adjust, loosen the set screws in the set collar and slidethe set collar, compression springs, and the SpacerMagnet Assembly up or down the tube to the desiredposition and retighten set screw. Sliding the parts towardthe Switch Assembly will advance the start of thewrapping mode and away from the switch will delay thewrapping mode.

1 – Clamp/Magnet2 – Shuttle Return Switch3 – Tube4 – Spacer Magnet Assembly5 – Nominal Factory Settings of 16-1/4″ (413 mm) for

1475 & 22-1/2″ (572 mm) for 1875

Fig. 89

��

QUICK WRAP ADJUSTMENTS

Drive Roller Chain (Fig. 90)Occasionally, it may be necessary to readjust the twoDrive Roller Chains on the left-hand side of the PinchRollers and Knife assembly. Proceed as follows:

1. Loosen mounting hardware on Double SprocketIdler Bracket.

2. Adjust the tension of the Inner Chain (Knife as-sembly to Double Sprocket Idler) first by slidingthe Idler away (outward in the slots in End Pan-el).

3. Keeping the Inner Chain taut, rotate the Idler in aclockwise direction to tension the Outer Chain(Double Sprocket to Pinch Roller). Retighten themounting hardware.

Page 76: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

907520/CP0600 74 Printed in U.S.A.

1 – Outer Chain2 – Inner Chain3 – End Panel4 – Idler Bracket5 – Mounting Bolt, Plain Washer, Lock Washer & Nut

(1 each of 3)6 – Double Sprocket Assembly

Fig. 90

6

1 4

5

2 3

Pinch Roller Mechanism(See Figs. 43 & 44)

The pressure on the Pinch Drive Roller against the IdlerRoller is adjusted by the Compression Spring andAdjusting Bolt on each side. Starting with the AdjustingBolt loose, set the pressure by equally tightening bothAdjusting Bolts just enough to allow rotation of the Idler(Steel) Roller. Equal pressure should be maintained onboth sides by measuring the Spring compressed dis-tance. This distance should be maintained at 1-3/4 to1-7/8″ (44 to 46 mm).

Feeder Belt Tension & Tracking(Figs. 91, 92 & 93)

NOTE: With different wrap materials in differentconditions, it may be necessary to increase the dis-tance between the Guides and Roller.

The Wrap Feeder Belts are preadjusted at the factory.Readjustment may be required after break-in has oc-curred. The Feeder Belts are friction-driven by the Baler(bale forming) Belts. BE SURE that the Baler Belts aretracking correctly. Refer to the Tracking & Alignmentsection in this chapter for additional information.

The Wrap Feeder Belt tension and tracking may beadjusted by repositioning the Idler Roller (See Item 1,Fig. 91). Loosen the mounting bolt in the ends of theIdler Roller. Using a suitable prying mechanism, tightenthe Feeder Belts equally on each side by moving the idlerrolled downward and retighten the mounting bolts.

Enough tension MUST be maintained in the Feeder Beltsto make the Belts track properly and prevent relativeslippage with the Baler (bale forming) Belts.

1 – Idler Roller for Tracking Adjustment2 – Feeder Belt Roller (Fixed)

Fig. 91: Right Side Tracking Adjustment(Tailgate shown open for clarity)

2

1

Operate the Baler and check the Belt tracking with theTailgate closed and locked. The Feeder Belts should beadjusted to track straight with minimal rubbing on theGuides while following the Baler (bale forming) Beltsrelatively close. Lowering the right side of the Rollerwill cause the Belts to travel to the left.

If the Feeder Belts still do NOT track satisfactorily, itwill be necessary to adjust the top Feeder Roller (SeeItem 1, Fig. 93). Start by loosening the idler roller andallow the Belts to go slack on both sides. The top FeederBelt Roller Shaft should be parallel with the Baler BeltTracking Roller before making the initial adjustmentfor Feeder Belt tracking. When doing the trackingadjustment, lowering the right side of the top FeederRoller will cause the Belt to track to the right. Usually,sliding the top Roller 1/8 to 1/4″ (3 to 6 mm) is anadequate adjustment. Proceed by tightening the LowerIdler Roller as outlined earlier in this section.

1 – Idler Roller for Tracking Adjustment2 – Feeder Belt Roller (Fixed)

Fig. 92: Left Side Tracking Adjustment(Tailgate shown open for clarity)

2

1

Page 77: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

Printed in U.S.A. 75 907520/CP0600

1 – Measure Center of Shaft to Center of ShaftDistances On Both Ends of Gate To EstablishExact Parallel Alignment

Fig. 93: Tracking Adjustment Detail

1

Feeder Belt Fingers (Figs. 94 & 95)

The Feeder Belt Fingers are provided to guide the Netting.In their positions next to the Lower Feeder Belt Roller, theFingers must not contact the sides of the belt. Heating ofthe guides by belt contact will melt the net as it is pulledtowards the bale. Also, in this area, the Fingers strip theNetting from the Feeder Belts. As the Netting is broughtalong by the (bale forming) Belts, the Fingers guide theNetting toward the bale, in the area of the Tailgate Roller.The Fingers should always be adjusted to and maintainedat a distance of 1/4″ (6 mm) away from the Rollers in bothpositions.

1 – Feeder Finger Upper Anchor2 – Feeder Finger Lower Anchor3 – Solid Sawhorse

Fig. 94: Rear Gate Safely Propped up forFeeder Finger Adjustment

1

3

2

1 – Feeder Finger Attached on Left Side2 – Frame Mounting Tab

Fig. 95

1

2

NOTE: BE SURE to check that all of the Fingersare secured on the left side of their respectiveMounting Tabs.

Brake (Net) Tension(Figs. 96, 97 & 98)The Quick Wrap Net tension is established and con-trolled by the Brake Tension on the right side of theQuick Wrap unit. To properly adjust the Brake andsubsequent Net tension, proceed as follows:

NOTE: Brake tension adjustment regulates theamount of Quick Wrap Net tension on the bale. Es-tablishing a measured tension of 130 to 160 in-lb(15 to 18 Nm) on the Rubber Drive Roller, with atorque wrench, will provide the correct amount ofNet tension. Too much tension will prevent the Netstarting onto the bale. Too little tension will causethe Net to be wrapped too loosely causing poorweathering and crop loss.

1. Fully extend the Actuator.

2. Adjust the Washer assembly on the Strap so theBushing will catch in the detent, just as the Actua-tor is fully extended. BE SURE the Bushing is freeto rotate on its mounting Bolt (See Item 2, Fig. 97).

3. Using the Set Screw and Jam Nut on the side of theBrake Caliper, adjust the Activation Arm so it isperpendicular to the Caliper Housing (Fig. 97).

4. Adjust the Spring length to 2–1/6″ (52 mm)(Fig. 96).

5. Manually retract the Actuator. As the Actuator isretracted, the Strap assembly should hold the Piv-ot Assembly still and prevent it from rotating withthe Actuator. (This maintains the same Brake ten-sion as when the Actuator is fully extended.)

Page 78: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 7 – Adjustments

907520/CP0600 76 Printed in U.S.A.

6. Cycle the Actuator to make sure that the Strap iscatching the Detent at full Actuator extension.

1 – Ruler Being Used to Measure 1-7/8″ (48 mm)Compression Spring Length

Fig. 96

1

1 – Brake Activating Arm Perpendicular toCaliper Housing

2 – Punch Being Used to Show Washer andBushing Assembly on Strap

3 – Washer on End of Fully Extended Actuator4 – Detent in Pivot Assembly5 – Strap6 – Actuator7 – Set Screw and Jam Nut8 – Activation Arm

Fig. 97: Brake Adjustment

2

3

4

1

5

6

78

7. Use a torque wrench to check the torque readingon the Rubber Drive Roller. The torque should be130-160 in-lb (15 to 18 Nm), when the Brake isfully applied. If the torque is NOT correct, adjustthe Spring length to obtain a reading of 130-160in-lb (15 to 18 Nm), to rotate the Rubber DriveRoller (Fig. 98).

8. Retract the Actuator to make sure that the Strap,catching the Detent, is releasing properly. Whenthe Actuator is approximately 2/3 fully retracted,the Washer (on end of Actuator Rod) should dis-engage the Strap assembly from the “detent” posi-tion and release the Brake.

NOTE: Drive Rollers should be able to be ro-tated by hand when Actuator is retracted.

1 – Torque Wrench Being Used to SetBrake Pressure to 130 to 160 in-lb (15 to 18 Nm)

Fig. 98: Right Side Tracking Adjustment

1

Page 79: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 77 907520/CP0600

CHAPTER 8LUBRICATION

GENERAL INFORMATION

WARNINGNEVER lubricate the machine when any partof the unit is in motion. ALWAYS exercise theMANDATORY SAFETY SHUTDOWN PROCE-DURE (page 10), BEFORE lubricating the ma-chine.

It is well to remember that a sufficient amount of oil orgrease will prevent excessive part wear and earlyfailure.

IMPORTANT: Whenever service is performedon hydraulic components (valves, cylinders,hoses, etc.) or Transmission, care must be takento prevent discharging fluid onto the ground.Catch and dispose of fluid per local waste disposalregulations.

TRANSMISSION LUBRICATION

The Transmission should be checked after every 100hours of operation and the oil level replenished asnecessary. The Transmission requires 1 quart (.95 liters)of SAE 80W90 EP Gear Lube.

The Transmission should be checked occasionally foroil drips and dust accumulation which indicates theSeals are leaking. Oil which is tan in color and foamsexcessively indicates that it has water present andshould be replaced.

The Transmission is drained by removing the lowerPlug on the Transmission or Dipstick pipe tee. All plugsare located on the right side of the Transmission and areaccessed beneath the Baler Cross Frame. Fill Transmis-sion with the proper type and amount of oil or until oilappears at the oil check hole or the proper mark on theDipstick. Replace all Plugs.

IMPORTANT: Do NOT overfill the Transmission.Only fill it to the bottom of the Inspection Plug holeor to the mark on the Dipstick (for those modelswith Dipsticks).

TDC HYDRAULICS SYSTEMMaintain the fluid level in the Sight Tube at NO higherthan the upper oil level Decal mark on the Reservoirwith the Density Cylinders fully retracted. The TDCsystem comes primed from the factory with a specialgrade of hydraulic oil capable of operating at lowerambient temperatures than normal hydraulic oils. If lowtemperatures and slow shuttle returns are not a problem,ATF (Dexron II) is an acceptable oil to use in the TDCsystem. During the baling season, the fluid level shouldbe checked before each day of operation (or at least onceevery 10 hours) and replenished if the fluid drops belowthe lower oil level decal mark with the DensityCylinders fully retracted.

OILINGLubricate all Drive Chains every 10 hours (or daily) ofoperation using a clean oil or a good grade of foamingaerosol lubricant. The recommended method is to spraythe entire length of Chain on the center of the Rollerssufficiently to allow the chain sidebars to be thoroughlylubricated. It is better to lubricate Chains when they arewarm (after use, rather than before).

NOTE: For a Baler equipped with an accessoryAutomatic Chain Oiler, fill the Oil Reservoir Tank asoften as necessary with a good grade of clean pe-troleum oil (SAE 20-40). Usually, a full Tank shouldprovide adequate lubrication for producing100-150 bales.

Apply oil or foaming aerosol lubricant to the threads ofthe Pickup Height Adjustment Crank every 100 hours(or monthly).

Apply oil or foaming aerosol lubricant on all BaleStarter Pivot Bushings at the end of each baling seasonor before storing Baler. Best results are obtained if oil isapplied at the end of day or when Bushings are warm.

IMPORTANT: Remove any stems or leaveswhich might be wrapped around shafts next toBearings. Wrapped debris buildup can bedamaging to the Bearing Seals.

GREASINGNOTE: Grease all fittings on a prescribed basis,at the intervals of operation listed, before and afterstoring the unit, and as otherwise indicated. Use agood grade of Lithium base grease.

Page 80: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 8 – Lubrication

907520/CP0600 78 Printed in U.S.A.

Wipe dirt from the fittings before greasing to prevent thedirt from being forced into the Bearing or Pivot. Replaceany missing fittings, when noted. Force the grease intothe fitting until it comes out at the Bearing Seal or at theShaft. To minimize dirt buildup, avoid excessivegreasing.

IMPORTANT: In addition to the fittings, inspectand repack the Wheel Bearings at least once aseason. The Telescoping PTO Drive should alsobe separated and grease applied to the splines atleast three times during the harvesting season.Apply a light coat of grease on the Twine Knifefollowing each season and before placing the Balerinto storage.

QUICK WRAP LUBRICATIONThe Drive Roller Chains should be lubricated every 100hours using a good grade of foaming aerosol lubricant.The recommended method is to spray the entire lengthof Chain on the center of the Rollers sufficiently to allowthe chain sidebars to be thoroughly lubricated.

The only other required lubrication on the Quick Wrapunit is to apply oil or foaming aerosol lubricant to thevarious hinge or pivot points annually.

Grease Fitting Locations

Grease Every 10 hours (or Daily)

1. Telescoping Drive Crosses (3 Places)(can be either center of Cross or end of Cross)

2. Universal Jackshaft

3. Idler Arm Pivot (Right Side)

4. Lower 8″ Roller Bearing Housing (1 each side)

5. Lower 16″ Roller Bearing Housing (1 each side)(On right side, hidden beneath shield)

6. Packing Roller Arm Bearing (1 each side)

7. Packing Roller Arm Pivot (1 each side)

8. Bale Starter Pivot Bearing (1 each side)

9. Gate End Roller Bearing (1 each side)

10. Gate Latch Torsion Tube Pivot (1 each side)

11. Scraper Roller Bearing Housing (1 each side)

Grease Every 50 hours (or Weekly)

12. Overrunning Clutch (Scraper Roll)

13. Pickup Drive Belt Idler Pivot

14. Twine Tie Pivots (2 Places)

15. Pickup Flotation Torsion Shaft Pivot (1 each side)

16. Telescoping Drive Tube

17. CV Joint Housing (2 Places)

18. Gate Cylinder Pivot (1 each side)

19. Gate Latch Bearing (1 each side)

20. PTO Overrunning Shear Device

Grease Every 100 hours (or Monthly)

21. Gate Pivot Bushing (1 each side)

22. TDC Cylinder Idler Pivot (1 each side)

23. Optional Crowder Wheel Pivot (1 each side)

ImplementEnd

TractorEnd

Telescoping PTO Drive

16

17

17 11

1

20

1

1

Page 81: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 8 – Lubrication

Printed in U.S.A. 79 907520/CP0600

Front Master

12

4

7

8

6

3

13

5

15

23

2

14

Page 82: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 8 – Lubrication

907520/CP0600 80 Printed in U.S.A.

The following is a duplicated listing of the GreaseFitting Locations provided for your convenience whenviewing the locations in the photographs.

Grease Fitting Locations

Grease Every 10 hours (or Daily)

1. Telescoping Drive Crosses (3 Places)(can be either center of Cross or end of Cross)

2. Universal Jackshaft

3. Idler Arm Pivot (Right Side)

4. Lower 8″ Roller Bearing Housing (1 each side)

5. Lower 16″ Roller Bearing Housing (1 each side)(On right side, hidden beneath shield)

6. Packing Roller Arm Bearing (1 each side)

7. Packing Roller Arm Pivot (1 each side)

8. Bale Starter Pivot Bearing (1 each side)

9. Gate End Roller Bearing (1 each side)

10. Gate Latch Torsion Tube Pivot (1 each side)

11. Scraper Roller Bearing Housing (1 each side)

Grease Every 50 hours (or Weekly)

12. Overrunning Clutch (Scraper Roll)

13. Pickup Drive Belt Idler Pivot

14. Twine Tie Pivots (2 Places)

15. Pickup Flotation Torsion Shaft Pivot (1 each side)

16. Telescoping Drive Tube

17. CV Joint Housing (2 Places)

18. Gate Cylinder Pivot (1 each side)

19. Gate Latch Bearing (1 each side)

20. PTO Overrunning Shear Device

Grease Every 100 hours (or Monthly)

21. Gate Pivot Bushing (1 each side)

22. TDC Cylinder Idler Pivot (1 each side)

23. Optional Crowder Wheel Pivot (1 each side)

Page 83: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 8 – Lubrication

Printed in U.S.A. 81 907520/CP0600

12

11

4

7

8

6

5

18

21

22

18

10

9

Rear Master

19

Page 84: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 82 Printed in U.S.A.

CHAPTER 9SERVICE

WARNINGBEFORE Servicing this unit, exercise theMANDATORY SAFETY SHUTDOWN PROCE-DURE (page 10).

NOTE: The following information is referred toin both the Troubleshooting Guide and the Mainte-nance Schedule chapters of this manual. It shouldalso be understood that all services covered in thischapter are Owner-Operator responsibilities.Where indicated, certain service routines shouldonly be carried out by an authorized GEHL Dealeror GEHL Company representative.

SEALED BALL BEARINGREPLACEMENT (Fig. 99)

Sealed Ball Bearings are used on various Shafts aroundthe unit. This type of Bearing is generally retained inplace with a Self-locking Eccentric Collar. The LockCollar has a counter bored recess, which is eccentricwith the Collar bore. This eccentric recess engages ormates with an eccentric end of the Bearing inner ring,when the Bearing is assembled on the Shaft. TheBearing is engaged, on the inner ring cam, by the Collar.This assembly grips the Shaft tightly with a positivebinding action that increases with use. The Collar SetScrew provides supplementary locking.

A Bearing can be removed from the Shaft by looseningthe Set Screw and tapping on a punch which is placed inthe drift pin hole, to loosen the Collar. Install Bearingswith self-locking Collars in the following manner:

1. Place the Bearing and Collar on the Shaft with thecam surfaces next to each other. Tighten the boltson the Bearing Retainers.

2. Mate the cam of the Lock Collar with the cam ofthe Bearing inner ring.

3. Press the Locking Collar against the Bearing wideinner ring and turn it, in the direction of Shaft rota-tion, until it tightly engages. Tighten the Collarfurther by tapping on a punch inserted in the driftpin hole.

NOTE: Avoid damaging the Collar by overtigh-tening it.

4. Last, tighten the Set Screw in the Locking Collar.

1 – Bearing2 – Set Screw3 – Collar Cam4 – Wide Inner Cam Ring5 – Drift Pin Hole6 – Eccentric Self Locking Collar

Fig. 99

5

6

78

1

2

BALE SIZE INDICATOR CORD(AUTOMATIC & MANUAL TWINEWRAP MODELS ONLY)(Fig. 100)

The Bale Size Indicator Cord links the Pointer above theIndicator Plate to the Belt Shuttle on top of the Baler.Pointer position, through appropriate Cord routing,changes with the position of the Shuttle which moves asthe bale grows in size inside the Bale Chamber. If the3/16″ Cord wears out, a new Cord can be obtained and

Page 85: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

Printed in U.S.A. 83 907520/CP0600

routed as shown. For the RB1475, order part number052595 or, for the RB1875, order part number 070607.

1 – Indicator Cord2 – Pointer3 – Indicator Plate

Fig. 100: Indicator Cord Routing

GATE HYDRAULICS (Fig. 101)Refer to the Hydraulic Circuit Diagram provided fordetails on Gate Cylinder plumbing.

1 – Right Gate Cylinder2 – Left Gate Cylinder3 – To Tractor Hydraulics Output4 – To Optional Chain Oiler5 – Gate Cylinder Lock Valve

Fig. 101

� �

WARNINGNEVER use your hands to search for hydraulicfluid leaks. Escaping fluid under pressure canbe invisible and penetrate your skin causingserious injury! If any fluid is injected into yourskin, see a doctor at once! Injected fluid MUSTbe surgically removed by a doctor familiarwith this type of injury or gangrene may result.

PICKUP (Figs. 102, 103 & 104)

1 – Three Holes for 3/8 x 3/4″ Cap Screws2 – Hole for 3/8 x 1-1/4″ Grade 8 Cap Screws3 – Retainer4 – Reel5 – Cam Arm6 – Cam7 – Cam Follower (520175)8 – Cam Bolt (066490)9 – 1/16″ to 1/8″ (1.6 to 3.2 mm)

Fig. 102: Cam Follower

( (

��

!

"

(*(

Page 86: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

907520/CP0600 84 Printed in U.S.A.

The Pickup should be inspected on a routine basis every100 hours of operation. The following inspectionsshould be made:

1. The Cam Follower Bearings should be positionedfrom 3/16″ to 5/16″ (4.75 to 8 mm) away from theinside edge of the Cam Track as shown.

2. Depending on conditions, the Cam Followers willwear out and need to be replaced. When replacing,it is recommended that the Bolt (GEHL 066490)also be replaced. Apply Loctite 609 or equiva-lent and torque the Bolt to 75 ft-lb (104 N-m).

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the Pickupfrom the Baler to replace the Cam Follower Bear-ing. An access port is provided. See Fig. 103 for de-tails.

1 – Cam Bearing Access Port

Fig. 103

1

1 – Drive Sheave2 – Two Set Screws3 – Keyway4 – Driven Sheave5 – Front of Pickup6 – Idler

Fig. 104

� �

��

!

NOTE: NO lock washer is used with the 066490Bolt.

3. To check for Cam wear and binding in the Cam,remove the V-Belt which drives the Pickup andturns the Drive over one complete revolution byhand.

NOTE: Readjust any areas that are binding.

4. Inspect the (4 each side) Sintered-metal Bearingsat points where the Bars pivot. Oil Seals are pro-vided on each side of these Bearings. Also, BESURE to check that the Tine Bar hardware is tight-ly secured.

5. Check for broken Pickup Tines. Best operation isonly obtained after all broken Tines have been re-placed. Pickup Tines can be ordered by GEHLnumber 071607 (for the double Tine) or 071939(for the single Tine).

The Pickup Drive Sheave has (2) set screw holes and theDriven Sheave has (2) set screw holes. The hole over thekeyway contains two set screws, one screw to lock theother, similar to jam nuts. Install the appropriateSheaves on their respective Shafts as shown.

TOTAL DENSITY CONTROL(TDC) SYSTEM

WARNINGNEVER use your hands to search for hydrau-lic fluid leaks. Escaping fluid under pressurecan be invisible and penetrate your skin caus-ing serious injury! If any fluid is injected intoyour skin, see a doctor at once! Injected fluidMUST be surgically removed by a doctor fa-miliar with this type of injury or gangrene mayresult.

Reservoir Air Pressure (Fig. 105)

The TDC system comes primed from the factory with aspecial grade of hydraulic oil capable of operating atlower ambient temperatures than normal hydraulic oils.If low temperatures and slow shuttle returns are not aproblem, ATF (Dexron II) is an acceptable oil to use inthe TDC system. The system is to be pressurized to 150PSI (1050 kPa) by air pressure in the Reservoir. Fornormal operation, the Reservoir Pressure Gauge MUST

Page 87: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

Printed in U.S.A. 85 907520/CP0600

indicate a pressure reading of 140 to 150 PSI (980-1050kPa). If the reading is NOT within this range, either addAIR or bleed off AIR, as necessary, using the Tank Inletand Valve Stem at the top of the Reservoir.

WARNINGDO NOT pressurize the Reservoir to morethan 150 PSIG (1050 kPa) when adding air andNEVER pressurize with anything other thanAIR!

1 – Relief Valve & Adapter2 – Tank Inlet & Valve System3 – TDC Reservoir4 – Sight Tube5 – Valve Trip Mechanism6 – Trip Arm7 – Oil Level Mark8 – Density Cylinder9 – Trip Spacer

10 – Adjustable Relief Valve11 – Reservoir Pressure Gauge12 – Density Cylinder Air Bleed Valve

Fig. 105

1 2

3

4

56

7

8

9

10

11

12

NOTE: When operating this machine duringtimes of extreme cold ambient temperatures and ifa faster shuttle return speed is desired, use only oilsupplied by Gehl in the TDC System. Refer to the“Draining and Repriming System” later in thisChapter for the proper draining procedure.

Reservoir (Fig. 105)The Reservoir fluid level should be checked before eachday of Baler operation (or at regular 10 hour intervals)using the Sight Tube located on the forward side of theReservoir. Proper fluid level can be determined whenboth Density Cylinders are fully retracted. In thiscondition, the level of fluid in the Sight Tube should beslightly below the level mark Decal.

NOTE: If the fluid level is below the bottom 1″(25 mm) level mark, add fluid BEFORE attemptingto operate the Baler. Refer to the “Adding Fluid toReservoir” topic below for proper refilling proce-dures.

WARNINGDO NOT remove any hydraulic lines or fittingsuntil you are sure that the system is depressu-rized and that there is no load on any hydrau-lic components. Failure to heed may result inpersonal injury.

Adding Fluid to Reservoir (Fig. 105)

WARNINGNEVER contaminate the reservoir fluid withany flammable liquid. ONLY use non-flam-mable cleaning solvents for cleaning compo-nents or containers used for storing, trans-porting or transferring the fluid. If the fluidshould become contaminated with a flam-mable liquid, the resulting mixture, whencombined with compressed air, can explodecausing death or serious injury.

To add fluid to the TDC System Reservoir, proceed asfollows:

1. Make sure TDC cylinders are fully retracted (Bal-er empty and tailgate closed and latched).

2. Clean the top of the Reservoir to prevent any con-tamination during draining or refilling.

3. Fully depressurize the system by loosening or re-moving (and retaining) the Valve Stem from theInlet at the top of the Reservoir.

Page 88: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

907520/CP0600 86 Printed in U.S.A.

4. Remove and retain the Relief Valve Adapter fromthe top of the Reservoir.

5. The TDC system comes primed from the factorywith a special grade of hydraulic oil capable of op-erating at lower ambient temperatures than nor-mal hydraulic oils. If low temperatures and slowshuttle returns are not a problem, ATF (Dexron II)is an acceptable oil to use in the TDC system. Addthe necessary amount of fluid through the ReliefValve Adapter opening to bring the level in theSight Tube in line with the lower level mark on theTDC Reservoir (both Density Cylinders MUSTbe fully retracted when using the lower levelmark).

6. After the proper amount of fluid has been added,reinstall and secure Relief Valve Adapter (andValve Stem, if removed) at top of the Reservoir.

7. Using AIR pressure ONLY, repressurize the sys-tem to 140-150 PSI (980-1050 kPa).

If the system has air in it (or gets air into it from openinga hydraulic line), it MUST be reprimed. Or, if the systemrequires complete draining (to change to a lighter orheavier fluid, for example), refer to the “SystemDraining and Repriming Procedure” for details.

System Draining and ReprimingProcedures (Fig. 105)1. Make sure TDC cylinders are fully retracted (Bal-

er empty and tailgate closed and latched).

2. Clean the top of the Reservoir to prevent any con-tamination during draining or refilling.

3. Fully depressurize the system by loosening or re-moving (and retaining) the Valve Stem from theInlet at the top of the Reservoir.

4. Remove and retain the Hardware securing the TripSpacer to the Trip Arm for the right side DensityCylinder and remove the Trip Spacer. This MUSTbe done to prevent accidental activation of theValve Trip Mechanism.

5. Fully extend both Density Cylinders by pulling onthe Belts at the back of the Baler (this will pull theShuttles back and extend the Cylinders) and thenblock them in the extended position so they willNOT retract.

6. Check the fluid level in the Reservoir. With bothDensity Cylinders fully extended, the fluid levelshould be in line with or slightly above the upperlevel mark on the Reservoir. If fluid has to be add-ed, go to Step 9.

If the fluid is going to be drained and replaced,continue with Step 7. If repriming is all that is required,go to Step 9.

7. Place a 2 gallon or larger container near the rightside Density Cylinder to catch the fluid duringdraining. Disconnect the TDC Reservoir Hydrau-lic Hose at the Manifold Disconnect and allow thefluid to drain into the container.

IMPORTANT: Whenever service is performedon hydraulic components (valves, cylinders,hoses, etc.), care must be taken to preventdischarging fluid onto the ground. Catch anddispose of fluid per local waste disposalregulations.

8. After draining is completed, reconnect the Hy-draulic Hose at the Manifold Disconnect.

9. Remove and retain the Relief Valve Adapter fromthe top of the Reservoir.

10. The TDC system comes primed from the factorywith a special grade of hydraulic oil capable of op-erating at lower ambient temperatures than nor-mal hydraulic oils. If low temperatures and slowshuttle returns are not a problem, ATF (Dexron II)is an acceptable oil to use in the TDC system. Addthe necessary amount of fluid through the ReliefValve Adapter opening to bring the level in theSight Tube in line with the upper level mark on theTDC Reservoir (both Density Cylinders MUSTbe fully extended when using the upper levelmark).

11. After the proper amount of fluid has been added,reinstall and secure Relief Valve Adapter (andValve Stem, if removed) at top of the Reservoir.

12. Check the Belts to MAKE SURE that they areNOT twisted and remove any blocking used tohold the Density Cylinders in the extended posi-tion.

13. Using AIR pressure ONLY, repressurize the sys-tem to 140-150 PSI (980-1050 kPa). Repressuriz-ing the Reservoir forces oil through the hydrauliclines and retracts the Density Cylinders.

14. Bleed any air that may have entered the DensityCylinders by carefully opening the Bleed Valve atthe top of each Density Cylinder.

NOTE: It may be necessary to repeat steps 3.,9., 10., 11., 12. and 13. several times in order tocompletely bleed the air from the Density Cylin-ders.

Page 89: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

Printed in U.S.A. 87 907520/CP0600

15. Reinstall the Trip Spacer and secure it to the TripArm. MAKE SURE that the Trip Spacer properlycontacts the Valve Trip Mechanism before resum-ing baling.

Pressure Relief Valve(Figs. 105 & 106)Faulty Valve OperationMalfunction of the Adjustable Pressure Relief Valve issuspected if one or more of the following conditionsarise while baling:

1. If desired density bale can NOT be produced, con-tamination may be keeping the Relief Valve Pop-pet from seating properly. To test this: first, fullydepressurize the system by loosening or removing(and retaining) the Valve Stem from the Inlet at thetop of the Reservoir. Then, remove the Pipe Plugfrom the top of the Adjustable Relief Valve Man-ifold and in its place, install a 1000 PSI (7000 kPa)MINIMUM pressure gauge. Next, loosen theLocking Ring on the Adjustable Relief Valve (turnit counterclockwise) and then, gently turn the EndDisc clockwise until it bottoms. Now, remove theTrip Spacer and rotate the Valve Trip Mechanismclockwise to its upper stop position. Make surethat there is sufficient fluid in the Reservoir andthen open the Gate to extend the Density Cylin-ders. The indicated pressure on the pressure gauge(installed above) MUST be at least 500 PSI (3500kPa), otherwise the Relief Valve Poppet is NOTseating properly.

2. If the Density Cylinders will NOT retract quickly,contamination may be blocking the Check Valveand preventing the hydraulic oil from flowingfreely through the Valve. To check this, turn theValve Trip Mechanism to its counterclockwisestop position when the Density Cylinders are ex-tended. If the Cylinders quickly retract, the CheckValve is malfunctioning.

3. If excess power is required for baling or if frequentBelt failure is experienced, contamination may beblocking the Relief Valve Poppet, thereby pre-venting free flow of fluid through the Valve. Totest this, use the same test procedures as for Step1 above and if the gauge reading rises above 700PSI (4900kPa), the Relief Valve may be blocked.

If any or all of the above situations occur, the PressureRelief Valve can be partially disassembled followingdetails in the next topic.

Relief Valve Removal & Replacement

If the Adjustable Pressure Relief Valve is suspected ofleaking or blockage, it can be partially disassembled inthe following manner:

WARNINGDO NOT remove any hydraulic lines, fittingsor components until you are sure that the sys-tem is depressurized and that there is no loadon any hydraulic components. Failure to heedmay result in personal injury. To fully depres-surize the system, loosen or remove (and re-tain) the valve stem from the inlet at the top ofthe reservoir (see Ref. 2, Fig. 108).

1 – Ring & Backup Washer2 – Area of Possible Contamination3 – Locking Ring4 – End Disc5 – O-Ring6 – Poppet

Fig. 106: Adjustable Relief Valve Cartridge

� �

��

!

Page 90: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

907520/CP0600 88 Printed in U.S.A.

1. MAKE SURE the system is depressurized. Also,MAKE SURE the Density Cylinders are fully re-tracted and there is NO bale in the machine.

2. Carefully disconnect the Reservoir-to-ManifoldHose at the Manifold Disconnect Coupler.

3. Remove and retain all but one of the four ManifoldBracket mounting bolts so the Manifold assemblycan be swung clockwise as far as the Hose connec-tions will allow and temporarily secured (with theremaining screw). The Manifold should be rotatedto avoid excessive fluid loss.

IMPORTANT: Whenever service is performedon hydraulic components (valves, cylinders,hoses, etc.), care must be taken to preventdischarging fluid onto the ground. Catch anddispose of fluid per local waste disposalregulations.

WARNINGBE SURE to wear a face and eye protectionshield or goggles and position yourself sothat your face is away from the valve to pre-vent contact with the escaping fluid.

4. Carefully loosen the Adjustable Relief Valve andbleed off pressure from the system.

5. After pressure has been removed, the Valve can beremoved from the Manifold and the openingshould be plugged to prevent contamination.

6. Inspect the Cartridge for a leaky or blocked Pop-pet. Force the Poppet on the front end of the Car-tridge backward and, using a clean punch, rotatethe Poppet to dislodge any contamination.

7. After step 5 has been performed, check the twooutside O-rings for damage and then replace theCartridge into the Manifold.

8. With the Cartridge replaced, reattach the Man-ifold assembly into its original mounting positionand secure it.

9. Carefully and properly reconnect Quick coupler.

10. Check the Reservoir fluid level and pressurize to140-150 PSIG (980-1050 kPa) before attemptingto resume operation.

NOTE: If the Baler fails to operate properlyafter the above procedures have been carried out,contact your dealer for further directives. To orderreplacement Valve Cartridge, specify GEHL part#094191 (1475) and 127112 (1875).

To repair Cartridge specify GEHL part #094193 for SealKit. Replace Check Valve with part #119302.

TRANSMISSIONIMPORTANT: Internal Transmission componentrepairs and replacements should only beattempted by (or under the direction of) anauthorized GEHL equipment dealer.

To remove Transmission for service, proceed as follows:

1. Remove Windguard Assembly.

2. Remove Twine Tie System (5 bolts, 1 electricalconnection on Manual Tie, 2 electrical connec-tions on Auto-Electric models).

3. Release Drive Chain tension, break the DriveChain and loosen the Bearing attaching hardware.

4. Loosen 4 flangette mounting bolts on cross shaft.

5. Slide cross shaft off of transmission output shaft.

6. Remove the (4) fasteners securing the Transmis-sion Housing to the Crosstube.

7. Carefully remove the Transmission from the unit.

After service is performed, replace the Transmission inreverse order of removal. Then, replace the oil until itcomes out the Inspection Hole or reaches the full markon the Dipstick. The Transmission requires 3 U.S. pintsof SAE 80W90EP Gear Lube. Replace and readjust theDrive Chain.

TWINE KNIFEWhen resharpening the Twine Knife, only sharpen thebeveled edge. Remove the (2) bolts to take the Knife offthe Cut-off Arm.

BELTS

WARNINGBEFORE Servicing this unit, exercise theMANDATORY SAFETY SHUTDOWN PROCE-DURE (page 10).

Page 91: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

Printed in U.S.A. 89 907520/CP0600

Activating Shuttle Locks (Fig. 107)

WARNINGBEFORE servicing the belts, BE SURE to re-lease the tension on the belts with the shuttlelocks. NEVER have the PTO engaged whilethe shuttle locks are engaged. ALWAYS en-gage BOTH locks to make sure that belt ten-sion is completely locked out.

To use the Shuttle Locks, first open the Gate. Then,carefully climb up onto Twineboxes, remove the

Hairpin Cotterpins and swing the Locks over. Reinstallthe Hairpin Cotterpins, carefully climb down and thenslowly close the Gate.

1 – Shuttle Lock “Engaged” (One Each Side)

Fig. 107

1

1 – Relief Valve & Adapter2 – Valve Stem3 – Sight Tube4 – Reservoir5 – Trip Arm6 – Trip Spacer Assembly7 – Right Density Cylinder

Fig. 108: Total Density Control (TDC) System

8 – Valve Trip Mechanism9 – Manifold

10 – Relief Valve Cartridge (070633)11 – Pressure Gauge12 – To Left Density Cylinder13 – Magnet (Inside Reservoir)

!

"

��

��

��

��

Page 92: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

907520/CP0600 90 Printed in U.S.A.

Belt Tension (Fig. 108)If the Belts do NOT return or otherwise are NOTreturning fast enough after ejecting a bale, check out thefollowing items in the order listed to troubleshoot andcorrect the problem.

1. Check the Gauge pressure for the Reservoir whilethe Baler is empty. If the pressure reads less than140-150 PSI (980-1050 kPa), add air to bring thepressure up to 140-150 PSI (980-1050 kPa). If thepressure drops again after a short time, there ismost likely a leak at one of the fitting connections.To find the leak, apply a soapy water solution tothe fittings and watch for air bubbles to form. Asnecessary, tighten the fitting connection or replacethe fitting. Be careful NOT to overtighten the fit-tings and damage the threads.

2. Check the Reservoir hydraulic fluid level. Withthe Cylinders fully retracted, the fluid should bebetween 1″ (25 mm) from the bottom of the Reser-voir to just below the Oil Level Decal mark. Referto TDC System topic in this chapter under Reser-voir subtopic for additional information.

3. Check the plumbing arrangement and compareyour machine to the routing shown in the TDCHydraulic Circuit Diagram provided.

4. Check the operation of the Pressure Relief Valvefollowing details under the Pressure Relief Valvesubtopic contained within the TDC System in-formation in this chapter.

5. Check for sticking Density Cylinders. Release theReservoir air pressure. Remove the Trip Spacerfrom the Trip Arm and then fully extend both Den-sity Cylinders by pulling the Belts at the back ofthe Baler. Slowly pressurize the Reservoir to 25PSI (75 kPa). Cylinders should retract completelyand smoothly.

Cause of Belt FailureWhen a Belt fails, it will usually occur in the area ofLacing Hooks and will be caused by one or more of thefollowing:

1. Bale improperly formed.

2. Lacing wire worn or broken.

3. Belt not properly laced.

4. Belts not tracking properly.

5. Build-up on Roller(s) or Scraper.

6. Baling when conditions are too wet.

Splicing and Re–lacing (Fig. 109)

Belts are laced with #4-1/2HT Clipper Lacing Hooksand 3/32″ diameter Nylon-coated Cable. These materi-als and a 6″ (152 mm) Vice Lacer can be obtained asservice accessories; see the Optional Features & Acces-sories chapter of this manual.

To relace a Belt, the following additional items will beneeded: small square, ball–point pen, sharp knife,long-nose pliers, slip-joint pliers and a vice.

To re–lace a Belt, follow the procedure below:

1. Open the Rear Gate, engage the Shuttle Locksand completely close Gate to remove Belt tension.Then remove the Belt to be re–laced.

2. Mark the Belt with the small square and ball–pointpen just behind the old hooks or 5/8″ (16 mm)from the end of the Belt. Carefully cut the Beltwith a sharp knife. Check the squareness fromboth sides after cutting. Clip the corners as shown.

NOTE: Relace both ends of a pulled lacing joint.By limiting the amount of Belt cut to 5/8″ (16 mm)on each end, a Belt can be re–laced twice beforealternative action is required; see Maintaining BeltLength section for details.

3. Install #4-1/2HT Hooks with the Vice Lacer.Make sure the ends of the Hooks protrude throughthe Belt and are clinched over.

4. Make sure outside Hooks are on the leading Beltend. Install relaced Belt in the Baler.

5. Cut an 8″ (203 mm) long piece of Nylon-coatedCable. Bend a 3/4″ (19 mm) loop in one end of theCable. Install Cable in splice positioning loop asshown.

6. Restore Belt tension by opening the Rear Gate andreturning the Shuttle Locks to storage.

7. Using the long-nose pliers, trim and bend the re-maining end of the Cable into a loop with a mini-mum of 3/4″ (19 mm) engagement into the lacing.

NOTE: To keep the belt splice in good operatingcondition, it is recommended that the LacingCables be replaced every 500 bales.

Page 93: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

Printed in U.S.A. 91 907520/CP0600

1 – Trailing End2 – Leading End3 – Outside Lacing Hook4 – Direction of Belt Travel5 – Lacing Pin (cable)

Fig. 109

� �

Maintaining Belt Length

The length of the Belts should be maintained within2-1/2″ (63.5 mm). This 2-1/2″ (63.5 mm) differencebetween Belt lengths can be achieved in either of twoways:

a. by switching Belts around to different posi-tions, or

b. by using Dutchman Splices.

a) Switching Belts

The lacing on the outside Belts is more likely to failbefore the inside Belt lacing. Outside Belts that havealready been relaced can be switched towards the centerof the Baler where less stress will be placed on thelacing.

NOTE: This practice of switching is the recom-mended procedure for purposes of expense andrepair time reduction.

b) Dutchman Splice

The original or matching Belt length can be restored byusing a Dutchman Splice on a Belt which has beenshortened excessively by repeated re–lacings, a diago-nal cut or a tear.

NOTE: It is important to keep an accurate re-cord of re–lacing for each Belt so that a Belt can bere–laced twice before the Belt is switched or aDutchman is necessary.

Dutchman Splice InstallationNOTE: The Dutchman Splice MUST be at least12″ (305 mm) in Belt length for ample lacing sepa-ration. If Lacings are staged too close together, theBelt Lacings will fail quicker. BE SURE to use thelongest Dutchman available as the piece that willbe cut off. The long Belt will (hopefully) be goodenough for more than 1 foot and then itself be us-able as a Dutchman. Refer to the Optional Fea-tures & Accessories chapter for Dutchmans avail-able.

RB1475 Belt (Fig. 110)Perform the following steps to restore a short or tornRB1475 Belt:

1. Cut one end off the long Belt as close to the dam-aged area as possible and without including thedamaged area. Relace this end.

2. Determine what overall length of Belt has to bedeveloped (Belt length only, NOT including Lac-ing). To determine the overall length, consider thefollowing:

a. A new Belt is 469″ (11 913 mm) long.

b. Belts should be maintained within 2-1/2″(63.5 mm) of each other.

c. Check your records as the Belt may alreadyhave been reduced in length due to previousLacing failures.

3. After the overall length required has been deter-mined, subtract the following:

a. Dutchman belt length

b. Extra gap necessary of 1/2″ (13 mm)

4. After the above measurements and calculationsare made, cut the long Belt to the appropriatelength determined and re–lace it.

5. Install the Cable Lacing Pin in one joint, reas-semble the Belt into the Baler and install the otherCable Lacing Pin.

Example

Given a 36″ (915 mm) Dutchman and a full length Beltthat is badly torn and now needs to be re–laced. To whatlength should the damaged Belt be cut. Refer to Fig. 110and follow the calculation below.

Page 94: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

907520/CP0600 92 Printed in U.S.A.

Solution

Belt Length Desired? (This may be less than 469″if all other Belts have already been cut off) 469″Minus Dutchman Belt Length -36″Minus Additional Belt Gap -1/2″(Due to additional Lacing) 432-1/2″Therefore, Belt MUST be cut to a length of 432-1/2″

A + B + 1/2″ (13 mm) = Belt Length Desired1 – 469″ (11 913 mm)2 – New Belt3 – Belt Length Desired4 – Tear5 – 1/2″ (13 mm)6 – 3/8″ (9.5 mm)7 – 35-1/4″ (895 mm)8 – 1/4″ (6 mm)9 – 432-1/2″ (10 986 mm)

Fig. 110: RB1475 Belt Repair Detail

!

"

RB1875 Belt (Fig. 111)

Perform the following steps to restore a short or tornRB1875 Belt:

1. Cut one end off of the long Belt as close to thedamaged area as possible and without includingthe damaged area. Re–lace this end.

2. Determine what overall length of Belt has to bedeveloped (Belt length only, NOT including Lac-ing). To determine the overall length, consider thefollowing:

a. A new Belt is 552″ (14 021 mm) long.

b. Belts should be maintained within 2-1/2″(63.5 mm) of each other.

c. Check your records as the Belt may alreadyhave been reduced in length due to previousLacing failures.

3. After the overall length required has been deter-mined, subtract the following:

a. Dutchman belt length

b. Extra gap necessary of 1/2″ (13 mm)

4. After the above measurements and calculationsare made, cut the long Belt to the appropriatelength determined and re–lace it.

5. Install the Cable Lacing Pin in one joint, reas-semble the Belt into the Baler and install the otherCable Lacing Pin.

ExampleGiven a 36″ (915 mm) Dutchman and a full length Beltwhich is badly torn and now needs to be relaced. To whatlength should the damaged Belt be cut. Refer to Fig. 111and follow the calculation below.

SolutionBelt Length Desired? (This may be less than 552″if all other Belts have already been cut off) 552″Minus Dutchman Belt Length? -36″Minus Additional Belt Gap? -1/2″(Due to additional Lacing) 515-1/2″Therefore, Belt MUST be cut to a length of 515-1/2″

Page 95: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

Printed in U.S.A. 93 907520/CP0600

A + B + 1/2″ (13 mm) = Belt Length Desired1 – 545-1/4″ (14 021 mm)2 – New Belt3 – Belt Length Desired4 – Tear5 – 1/2″ (13 mm)6 – 3/8″ (9.5 mm)7 – 35-1/4″ (895 mm)8 – 1/4″ (6 mm)9 – 515-1/2″ (14 021 mm)

Fig. 111: RB1875 Belt Repair Detail

!

"

WHEELS & TIRES

NOTE: Our Company does NOT sell replace-ment Tires. In addition, Tire mounting, repair andreplacements should ONLY be attempted by aqualified tire manufacturer’s representative or byproperly trained personnel following the tiremanufacturer’s instructions. If you do not havesuch instructions, contact your tire dealer or ourCompany.

Check the Baler Tire pressure after every 50 hours ofoperation. Tires should be inflated to the 40 PSI (280kPa). Wheel Lug Nut torque should be checked afterevery 50 hours of operation and tightened to 90 ft-lb(124 Nm) torque.

WARNING

Inflating or servicing tires can be dangerous.Whenever possible, trained personnel shouldbe called to service and/or mount tires. Inaddition, DO NOT place your fingers on thetire bead or rim during inflation; serious injuryor amputation could result. In any event, toavoid possible death or serious injury, followthe safety precautions below:

• BE SURE the rim is clean and free of rust.

• Lubricate both the tire beads and rimflanges with a soap solution. DO NOTuse oil or grease.

• Use a clip-on tire chuck with a remotehose and gauge, which allows you tostand clear of the tire while inflating it.

• NEVER inflate beyond 35 PSI (240 kPa) toseat the beads. If the beads have notseated by the time the pressure reaches35 PSI, deflate the assembly, repositionthe tire on the rim, relubricate both partsand reinflate it. Inflation pressure be-yond 35 PSI with unseated beads maybreak the bead or rim with explosiveforce sufficient to cause death or seriousinjury.

• After seating the beads, adjust the infla-tion pressure to the recommended oper-ating pressure listed.

• DO NOT weld, braze, or otherwise at-tempt to repair and use a damaged rim.

Page 96: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

907520/CP0600 94 Printed in U.S.A.

QUICK WRAP SERVICE

Knife Removal and Installation(Figs. 112 & 113)1. Begin by fully extending the Electric Actuator to ro-

tate the Knife Holder away from the Knife Cutoffposition. Then, unplug the Actuator to guarantee thatthe Knife can NOT be accidentally rotated.

1 – Shield Attachment Bolt, Plain Washer& Lock Washer (1 each of 4)

2 – Knife Shield

Fig. 112

112

2. Remove the Knife Shield by detaching the (4)mounting fasteners.

3. Rotate the Knife Holder rearward for access to themounting hardware.

WARNINGKnives are very sharp.

4. Take special notice of the position of the Knivesand Knife edges.

5. Detach the bolts and nuts and remove the Knivesfrom the Knife Holder.

6. Sharpen or replace the Knives.

7. Reinstall the Knives on top of the Knife Holderwith the beveled cutting edge facing down.

8. Reinstall the Knife Shield and tightly secure theattaching hardware before resuming operation.

1 – Knife Holder2 – Knife (1 of 2)3 – Knife Secured to Holder with (4 each) 5/16 x 1″

Cap Screws, Lock Washers and Hexagon Nuts.

Fig. 113

1 2 3 2

Page 97: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 9 – Service

Printed in U.S.A. 95 907520/CP0600

Notes

Page 98: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 96 Printed in U.S.A.

CHAPTER 10PREPARING FOR FIELD OPERATION

PREPARING THE MATERIAL

Material to be baled should be clean and dry. Wetmaterial will cause overloading in the Baler resulting inhigh Side Sheet resistance, wrapping on the Rollers andhigh Belt tension. In addition to baling problems, wetmaterial when baled will have a tendency to spoil easieras well as be more prone to spontaneous combustion.

Hay being prepared for round baling should be wind-rowed into a 45″ or 24″ (1143 or 610 mm) windrow forthe RB1475 or, 61″ or 36″ (1549 or 914 mm) windrowfor the RB1875 Baler. Corn stalks should be severedfrom their roots. Corn stalks, straw and other brittlematerials should be raked into a full-width windrow,since these materials tend to break-up and deterioratedue to Side Sheet friction. In addition, the widerwindrow will reduce crop loss or trash build-up.

NOTE: Improper windrow widths result in bar-rel-shaped bales because of material overlap inthe center of the bale. Narrow windrow widths willrequire a weaving path across the windrow to as-sure even crop distribution as the bale is formed.

TRACTOR REQUIREMENTS &HITCH CONNECTIONS (Figs. 115 &116)

Tractor

The Round Baler MUST be operated by a tractor withthe following:

1. A minimum power output of 50 hp (37 kW)(RB1475) and 60 hp (45 kW)(RB1875) for levelground or 70 hp (52 kW)(RB1475) and 75 hp (56kW)(RB1875) for hilly terrain or high densitybales.

2. Having NON-tricycle type front wheels.

3. Having a minimum rear wheel inside dimension45″ (RB1475) or 61″ (RB1875).

4. Equipped with a PTO which runs at 540 RPM witha standard 1-3/8″ 6-tooth spline (1000 RPM op-tional conversion is available).

5. Equipped with at least one set of double acting hy-draulic outputs to operate Gate Cylinders.

6. Having standard PTO and hitch dimensions con-forming to ASAE Standard S203, as shown.

Figure 115 shows one of the two possible mountingpositions for tractors with drawbars having 13 to 17″(330 to 432 mm) high ground clearance. Figure 116shows one of the two possible mounting positions fortractors with drawbars having a ground clearancegreater than 17″ (432 mm) high.

WARNINGNEVER connect a 1000 RPM tractor to a balerequipped for a 540 RPM PTO drive.

WARNINGBecause dry material is being processed, thetractor should also be equipped with a sparkarrestor muffler, if the tractor emits sparks.

IMPORTANT: If this unit is connected to a tractorequipped with a Hammer Strap style drawbar, theHammer Strap parts shown in dashed lines MUSTbe removed to prevent damage to the unitDriveline. See Fig. 114 for details.

1 – Hammer Strap Hitch Parts to be Removed

Fig. 114

1

Page 99: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 10 – Preparing For Field Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 97 907520/CP0600

1 – Tractor PTO Shaft*2 – 15-1/2″ (394 mm) for 540 Operation (17″, 432 mm,

1000 RPM)(Measured from retaining groove intractor PTO to center of Hitch Bolt)

3 – 6 to 12″ (150 to 300 mm)*4 – 13 to 17″ (330 to 432 mm) From Ground5 – Locking Hitch Bolt (Provided)

*Tractor MUST comply with ASAE Standard S203

Fig. 115: Drawbar Hitchplate in “Low”Mounting Position (For tractors with 13 to

17″ (330 to 432 mm) drawbar groundclearance

1 – Tractor PTO Shaft*2 – 15-1/2″ (394 mm) for 540 Operation (17″, 432 mm,

1000 RPM)(Measured from retaining groove intractor PTO to center of Hitch Bolt)

3 – 6 to 12″ (150 to 300 mm)*4 – 17 to 21″ (432 to 535 mm) From Ground5 – Locking Hitch Bolt (Provided)

*Tractor MUST comply with ASAE Standard S203

Fig. 116: Drawbar Hitchplate in “High”Mounting Position (Tractors with greater

than 17″ (432 mm) drawbar ground clearance

Drawbar ConnectionWhen hooking the Baler to the tractor drawbar, BESURE to use the Bolt, Nut and Hairpin Cotterpinprovided. To prevent the bolt from becoming anobstacle to hay movement, insert the bolt from thebottom side of the tongue. Install the Hairpin Cotterpinafter the Nut is secured. The proper Baler-tractorhook-up will NOT only allow maximum groundclearance but will also insure that the Baler will NOTbecome detached from the tractor.

DRAWBAR FLAP (Fig. 117)If the Baler Drawbar is catching and bunching up thewindrow below the Hitch, order and install a DrawbarFlap (420-34054) to help eliminate the problem.

1 – Drawbar Flap (420-34054)

Fig. 117

1

PTO CONNECTION (Figs. 115–119)

WARNINGDO NOT start the tractor until the locking de-vice is positively engaged to hold the tele-scoping drive couplings onto the tractor ptoshaft and baler transmission input shaft.Also, BE SURE that the drive shafts rotatefreely inside the drive shield tubes.

The Baler is equipped with a Constant VelocityTelescoping PTO Drive Shaft. This constant velocitycapability, while cornering, results in a smooth, quietrunning Drive Line, without power fluctuation.

Page 100: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 10 – Preparing For Field Operation

907520/CP0600 98 Printed in U.S.A.

NOTE: Whether in operation or NOT, the Maxi-mum Joint angle MUST NOT exceed 80°. Anyangle, greater than 80°, WILL result in damage tothe Joint. In addition, for continuous operation, themaximum Joint angle should be limited to 35°.Wide-angle Constant Velocity Joints are NOT de-signed for use as angled-gearboxes. Any continu-ous operation, at angles greater than 35°, will re-sult in shortening Joint life.

A – 35° (Maximum) in Continuous Operation &80° (Maximum) at Any Time

Fig. 118: PTO Constant Velocity Drive Shaft Joint

( (

HYDRAULIC CONNECTIONS(Fig. 119)The Hoses for the Hydraulic Gate Cylinders areequipped with Pioneer ASAE S366.1 (SAE J1036, ISO5675) quick-disconnect couplers. The Baler is deliveredalready primed with Type F Automatic TransmissionFluid (ATF) in the Gate Cylinder control hydraulicsystem. This should be changed if this is incompatiblewith your tractor hydraulic fluid. BE CAREFUL whenhandling the Hoses and fittings to insure that they arekept free of dirt and contamination to avoid damage tothe Baler and/or tractor hydraulic system.

NOTE: The Baler comes with the Rear GateCylinder system filled with Hydraulic TransmissionFluid. MAKE SURE this fluid is compatible withyour tractor’s hydraulic system BEFORE connect-ing to the tractor. If the fluid is NOT compatible, thesystem will have to be drained and refilled with thefluid used in your tractor.

1 – Hydraulic Disconnects (Customer Provided)2 – CV Joint Connected to Tractor PTO Shaft

Fig. 119

1

2

Page 101: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 10 – Preparing For Field Operation

Printed in U.S.A. 99 907520/CP0600

TWINE ROUTING (Figs. 120 thru124)To thread the Baler with twine, proceed as follows:

NOTE: Use the following twine routing proce-dure from each Twinebox through the Twine Tubesin the Baler Frame.1. Place up to three balls of twine in the Twinebox.

If continuous feeding is desired, route the twineend through the Guide above the twine ball on theTwinebox Cover, tie the twine ends together(always tie the outside twine end of the first ballto the inside twine end of the next ball forcontinuous feeding). On each side of the Baler,pull the end of twine from the center of the firstball and out through the hole in the side of theTwinebox.

1 – Twine Routed Through Guide in Cover2 – Twine Exiting Three-bale Twinebox3 – Twine Routed to and through Twine Tube in

Front Frame

Fig. 120

12

3

2. Feed the twine through the Twine Tube in theFront Frame, through the Rope Guide (ManualControl models) or Twine Sensor (Auto-Electricmodels) on the Frame, through the Twine Tube onthe corner of the Hitch.

NOTE: The characteristics of the wrapping ma-terials used to wrap bales varies significantly.Therefore, the way in which the twine is routedaround the Twine Wheels (or through the RopeGuides on Manual Tie Models) is important. Toachieve optimum placement of the wrapping mate-rial on the bale. The plastic material should bewrapped around the Twine Wheels 1-1/2 times.The sisal style twine works best with a 1/2 wraparound the Twine Wheel. However, if the TwineWheel appears to be slipping, 1-1/2 wraps aroundthe Twine Wheel should be considered.

NOTE: The Twine Keeper is to be adjusted sothe Tab of the Keeper rests on the Twine Guidewhile the outside corners of the Twine Keeper areflush with the outside edges of the Twine Wheels.The Twine Keeper is to be centered between theflanges of the Twine Wheel.

1 – Twine Spring resting on Guide2 – Twine Wheel3 – Twine Guide

Fig. 121: Twine Sensor(Automatic Bale Control Model)

2

1

3

Page 102: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 10 – Preparing For Field Operation

907520/CP0600 100 Printed in U.S.A.

1 – Least Tension2 – Medium Tension3 – Maximum Tension

Fig. 122: Automatic & Manual Twine WrapModels

� �

3. On RB1475 Model Balers, proceed routing thetwine through the two Rope Guides on the frontcenter of the Hitch and into one of the two Tubeson the Twine Arm.

On RB1875 Model Balers, proceed routing thetwine through the two upper Rope Guides on thefront of the Hitch and into the one Rope Guide onthe lower front of the Hitch. Continue into one ofthe two Tubes on the Twine Arm.

4. After the twine is through the Twine Arm, pullsome twine from the Twine Arm to make sure it isdispensing freely and NOT hanging up. Cut offany excess twine which is extending from theTwine Arm more than 12″ (305 mm).

1 – Twine Exiting Twine Tube in Front Frame2 – Twine Routed through Twine Sensor on Frame3 – Twine Routed into Guide Tube on Hitch Assy.4 – Twine Routed into Rope Guide to Twine Arm

Fig. 123: Twine Routing on RB1475 Baler(Automatic Bale Control Model)

1

2

3

4

1 – Twine from Twine Sensor2 – Twine to Twine Arm

Fig. 124: Twine Routing on RB1875 Baler(Automatic Bale Control Model)

2

11

NOTE: After the first bale has been tied, thetwine (extending from the Twine Arm) will be heldby the Clamp Jaws, after cutoff. The Clamp Jawsshould provide a 20″ (508 mm) tail of twine for start-ing to wrap the next bale.

START-UP

WARNINGBE SURE all bystanders are away from thebaler, all tools and other objects have been re-moved from the baler and the windrow is clearof all obstacles BEFORE proceeding. In addi-tion, BE SURE that the PTO shafts turn freelyinside their shield tubes before starting thetractor.

After the Baler is properly hooked up, start the tractorand run the PTO at a slow tractor RPM. Raise and lowerthe Rear Gate a few times to purge the hydraulic systemof air and to make sure the Rear Gate opens and closesfreely.

Page 103: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 101 907520/CP0600

CHAPTER 11TRANSPORTING

SMV EMBLEM & REFLECTORS(Fig. 125)GEHL Company complies with all laws for safety whentransporting slow-moving vehicles on public highways.The Baler is equipped with a Bracket for mounting aSlow–Moving Vehicle (SMV) emblem. The Baler isalso equipped with Red Reflector Strips on the rearcorners of both Twineboxes.

NOTE: The SMV emblem MUST be purchasedlocally.

When the Baler is equipped with the Quick Wrap option,a SMV Decal is already attached to the back of theQuick Wrap. See Decal chapter for details.

1 – Transport Lights2 – Red Reflector Strip (Back of each Twinebox)3 – SMV Emblem Mounting Bracket

Fig. 125

3

22

1 1

Because of the variations in safety laws for differentstates and localities, it may be necessary to change theEmblem Bracket location. Your local GEHL dealer canassist you in making the location change.

SAFETY CHAIN & TRANSPORTLIGHTING (Figs. 125 & 126)As required or when desired, the Baler can be equippedwith a Safety Chain for travel on public highways. Referto the Optional Features & Accessories chapter forordering information. The Safety Chain should beattached to the tractor and Baler as shown. Whenattached in this manner, the safety chain should have thefollowing characteristics:

1. Chain is sufficiently slack to allow turns andmovements of either the tractor or the farm imple-ment, without placing tension on chain.

2. Chain is of sufficient strength to hold the de-coupled implement (and its load) and tow it to theshoulder.

WARNINGALWAYS follow state and local regulations re-garding use of a safety chain and transportlights when towing farm equipment on publichighways. ONLY a safety chain (NOT an elas-tic or nylon/plastic tow strap) should be usedto retain the connection between the towingand towed machine, in the event of separationof the primary attaching system. BE SURE tocheck with local law enforcement agenciesfor your own particular regulations. Unlessotherwise prohibited, use a Slow-Moving Ve-hicle (SMV) emblem.

1 – CV Stand in “Storage” Position2 – Locking Hitchbolt3 – Drawbar Clevis (Provided)4 – Chain Secured Around Tractor Frame Member5 – Safety Chain Attached Around Baler Frame

Fig. 126

12

3

45

Page 104: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 11 – Transporting

907520/CP0600 102 Printed in U.S.A.

The RB1475 and RB1875 Round Balers are equippedwith Transport Lights as standard equipment. A cordwith a standard 7-pin connector to connect to the tractoris also provided. If your tractor is not equipped with theproper receptacle, see your tractor dealer for details.

PICKUP (Fig. 127)Whether the Baler is equipped with the optionalHydraulic Lift Kit or not, BE SURE to raise the Pickupto the transport position with the Hand Crank providedanytime the Baler is being transported. The Pickup israised by turning the Hand Crank in a clockwisedirection and lowered by turning the Hand Crank in acounterclockwise direction.

IMPORTANT: The Hand Crank settings act asthe lower limit stop for the Hydraulic Lift Kit. BESURE to reset this setting when resuming baling.

1 – Pickup Lift Hand Crank

Fig. 127: Baler With Pickup in “Transport” Position

1

Page 105: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 103 907520/CP0600

CHAPTER 12STORAGE

The following items are recommended for off-seasonstorage of the Baler:

1. Remove all crop material and debris from behindthe Sprockets, Sheaves, ends of the Rollers, Pick-up . . . etc.

2. Grease all Fittings and make sure the TelescopingPTO Drive is completely greased. Repack theWheel Bearings. Also, apply a light coat of greaseto the Twine Knife.

3. Release tension on the Belts by locking out theBelt Shuttle.

4. Release tension from the V-belt which drives thePickup.

5. Hydraulic Cylinder should be fully retracted andexposed Cylinder Rods should be coated withgrease.

6. Apply motor oil to all Roller Chains, TelescopingDrive Shields and Guard Door Hinges.

7. Store the unit inside a shed, if possible, or coverthe top half of the unit to protect the Belts, if storedoutside.

8. Reorder and replace any required parts so that theBaler will be ready to operate at the start of thenext baling season.

9. Cover and protect all exposed electrical connec-tors from dirt and corrosion.

10. Store Control Boxes in a protected dry area out ofthe weather.

NOTE: Before starting up next season, go overthe Checklists, chapter 3 in the front of this manual.

PROTECTION OFUNPAINTED SURFACESApply a rust preventative oil or grease to the followingunpainted surfaces:

— All Roller Chains and Sprockets

— The Front PTO Drive Yoke and PTO Shaft

— Inside Side Sheets where paint is worn off

Page 106: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 104 Printed in U.S.A.

CHAPTER 13TROUBLESHOOTING

NOTE: This Troubleshooting guide presents problems, causes and suggested remedies beyond the ex-tent of loose, worn or missing parts and it was developed with the understanding that the machine is inotherwise good operating condition. Refer to the index at the back of this manual for Chapter and Topicpage references. BE SURE to exercise the MANDATORY SAFETY SHUTDOWN PROCEDURE (page10), BEFORE making any adjustments or repairs.

BALE APPEARANCE

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Bale density is greater in thecenter than on the ends (bale isbarrel-shaped).

Improper placement of materialalong edge of bale.

Rerake material into a proper widthwindrow or drive Baler in a weavingfashion.

Adjustable Relief Valve pressure isset too low.

Increase Relief Valve pressure.

BALE DENSITY

Low Bale Density. Adjustable Relief Valve pressure isset too low.

Increase Relief Valve pressure.

Low Reservoir pressure. Increase air pressure to between140 to 150 PSI (980 to 1050 kPa).

Trip Spacer on Trip Arm is not en-gaging the Valve Trip Mechanism.

Adjust so that they are in line.

Poppet in adjustable Relief Valvenot seating properly or, 3/8″diameter Poppet is grooved.

Remove, inspect and clean ReliefValve Cartridge per instructions inService chapter. Repair with part#094193 Seal Kit.

Air in the hydraulic lines or fluid leveltoo low in Reservoir.

Re-prime system. Refill withcorrect oil.

BALE FILLING & BELTS

Bale fails to rotate or rotates spo-radically.

Faulty Scraper Roller OverrunningClutch Sprocket assembly.

Lubricate Clutch. Check withwrench to see if clutch is freeand overrunning in a clockwisedirection.

Material has too high of amoisture content.

Stop baling and wait for material todry out.

Pressure Relief setting too low. Increase Relief pressure setting.

Low pressure in Reservoir. Increase AIR to between140 to 150 PSI (980 to 1050 kPa).

Page 107: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 105 907520/CP0600

BALE FILLING & BELTS (cont.)

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Belts getting under Bale StarterFingers when closing Gate.

Bale Starter sticking inUp Position.

Lubricate all of the pivots on theBale Starter assembly. Leave PTOrunning while closing Gate.

Low Reservoir pressure. Increase pressure to between140 to 150 PSI (980 to 1050 kPa).

Extremely cold conditions. When ejecting bale, open Gate withPTO off, wait until Shuttle Stops,engage PTO and close and latchGate.

TDC oil too thick for cold conditions. Use recommended oil for TDCsystem; see Lubrication chapter.

Belt Lacing Hooks tearing outfrequently.

Bale improperly formed. Correctly form next bale; see“Baling” topic in Operationchapter.

Lacing Pin worn. Replace the Lacing Pin.

Belt improperly laced. Correctly lace Belt.

Belt NOT tracking properly. Correct Belt tracking; seeAdjustments chapter.

Build-up on Scraper or Rollers. Remove build-up.

Conditions too wet. Stop baling and wait for materialto dry.

Hooks improperly installed. Correct Hooks and clinch themover.

Adjustable Relief Valve pressuretoo high for crop conditions.

Reduce Relief Valve pressure.

Belts are making squealing noise. Baler is being run empty for too longa period of time.

Run Baler empty for a shorter time.

Gate End Roller improperlyadjusted.

Readjust End Roller; seeAdjustments chapter.

Shuttle returning too slow. Increase Reservoir pressure tobetween 140 to 150 PSI(980 to 1050 kPa).

Belts rubbing together in rear. Reduce bale diameter.

Belts traveling to the side(excessively).

Lacing is NOT square to Belt edge. Properly square edge and relaceBelt.

Belt Shuttle NOT square. Readjust Belt Shuttle; seeAdjustments chapter.

Belt length variation greater than2-1/2″ (64 mm).

Relace or replace Belts that aretoo short.

Belt Tracking Roller improperlyadjusted.

Readjust Belt Tracking Roller;see Adjustments chapter.

Page 108: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

907520/CP0600 106 Printed in U.S.A.

BALE FILLING & BELTS (cont.)

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Gate opens prematurely while baleis still being formed.

Gate Cylinders are NOT fullyretracted to activate Latch.

Fully retract Cylinders. If NOTpossible, check tractor andBaler circuits.

Gate Latch improperly adjusted. Readjust Latch; see Adjustmentschapter.

Improper use of tractor hydraulicsor closing the Gate with the hydrau-lics in the float position.

When closing the Gate, tractor hy-draulics should go to the ReliefPressure to insure that Gate islatched.

Tractor has faulty hydraulics. Refer to tractor manual for repair.

Tractor has low GPM output. Close Gate as quickly as possible toforce Hooks to engage Pins.

Excessive amount of materialpeeling off the bale resulting inlarge trash build-up.

Improper baling speed. Reduce the PTO speed and in-crease the ground travel speed.

Adjustable Relief Valve pressureis too high.

Reduce Relief Valve pressure.

Material wrapping around Rollers. Moisture content too high. Stop baling and wait for materialto dry.

Adjustable Relief Valve pressureis high.

Reduce Relief Valve pressure.

Scraper improperly adjusted. Readjust Scraper; seeAdjustments chapter.

Excessive PTO speed causingmaterial to peel off the bale.

Reduce the PTO speed.

CROP RELATED PROBLEMS

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Difficulty encountered in baling cornstalks, cane, etc.

Improper baling speed. Reduce the PTO speed and in-crease the ground travel speed.

Improper material preparation. Rake windrow into a full 45″ (1140mm) (1475) or 61″ (1550 mm)(1875) wide row.

Improper clearance betweenPacking Roller and Lower Roller.

Readjust clearance; seeAdjustments chapter.

Higher Belt Tension is appliedtoo soon.

Lower position of the Trip Spacer.

Material will NOT feed underPacking Roller.

Adjust Wheel Spindle positions toraise Baler so that Pickup can becarried lower. Install Packing RollerLagging Kit and/or remove righthand and left hand Crop Deflectors.

Page 109: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 107 907520/CP0600

CROP RELATED PROBLEMS (cont.)

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Difficulty getting bale to grow in lightwindrow.

Material is deteriorating on baleends. Too much time spentforming bale.

Rake light windrows together.

Gate End Roller to 16″ Lower Rollerclearance too great.

Reduce clearance; seeAdjustments chapter.

Material kicking ahead of Pickup. Improper baling speed. Reduce the PTO speed and in-crease ground travel speed.

Improper material preparation. Increase or decrease the windrowsize, as necessary.

Material wraps on Packing Roller. Bale Starter does NOT drop down. Lubricate all of the pivots on theBale Starter assembly. Leave PTOrunning while closing Gate.

Material has too high a moisturecontent.

Stop baling and wait for materialto dry.

FEEDING INTO BALER

Pickup can NOT be adjusted highenough or low enough.

Axle height improperly set. Readjust Axle height; seeAdjustments chapter.

Tractor drawbar height does NOTmeet specifications.

Readjust the drawbar height inaccordance with specifieddimensions listed in the Preparingfor Field Operation chapter ofthis manual.

Material NOT feeding betweenPacking Roller and 8″ Lower Roller.

Packing Roller too slippery. Install Packing Roller Lagging Kit.

Windguard set too high. Reduce Windguard’s upwardtravel.

Improper Packing Roller to LowerRoller clearance.

Readjust clearance; seeAdjustments chapter.

If occurring while starting a bale. Feed crop evenly until bale hasstarted to rotate.

Pickup is being carried too high forheavy windrows.

Adjust Wheel Spindle positions toraise Baler so that Pickup can becarried lower.

Material passes through the Baler. Gate NOT closed and latched. Close and latch Gate.

Gate End Roller to 16″ Lower Rollerclearance too great.

Readjust clearance; seeAdjustments chapter.

Page 110: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

907520/CP0600 108 Printed in U.S.A.

MISCELLANEOUS PROBLEMS

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Belts return too slow or fail to return. Reservoir pressure too low. Increase pressure to 140-150 PSI(980-1050 kPa).

Faulty Check Valve on DensityCylinders.

Replace or repair faulty CheckValve.

Oil level is too low in Reservoir. Re-prime system.

Defective or contaminated ReliefValve.

Remove, inspect and clean reliefValve per instructions in Servicechapter.

Operating in extremely coldconditions.

Fill Reservoir with recommendedhydraulic oil (see Lubrication chap-ter) and set Reservoir pressure to140-150 PSI (980-1050 kPa).

Drive Chain heating. Lack of lubrication. InstallAccessory Chain Oiler.

Refer to Lubrication chapter.

Poor Chain alignment. Realign Sprockets.

Relief Valve pressure is too high forcrop conditions.

Decrease Relief Valve pressure.

Material has too high a moisturecontent.

Stop baling and wait for materialto dry.

Pickup will NOT go into“Transport” position.

Mechanism blocked by debris. Remove debris from on top of eitherthe Pickup Header or Pivot Links.

“Transport” position improperlyadjusted.

Correctly adjust Pickup fortransport.

PICKING UP MATERIAL

Pickup kicks up corn stalks orother lightweight materials.

Improper baling speed. Reduce the PTO speed andincrease ground travel speed.

Improper material preparation. Increase the windrow size bycombining windrows.

Pickup is NOT completelycleaning material off the field.

Improper baling speed. Increase the PTO speed andreduce ground travel speed.

Broken or missing Tines. Replace broken or missing Tines.

Pickup set too high off the ground. Readjust Pickup to lower thesetting or lower the Baler Axle.

Windrow’s too wide or the material(such as straw) is falling to the sidesof the Pickup.

Obtain and install Crowder Wheels.

Page 111: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 109 907520/CP0600

PICKING UP MATERIAL (cont.)

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Pickup NOT running or running atbelow full speed.

Pickup set too low to the ground. Readjust Pickup to raise thesetting or raise the Baler Axle.

Improper Drive Belt tension. Readjust the tension; seeAdjustments chapter.

Pickup mechanism jammed. Clean out blockage.

Overfill Clutch mechanismactivated.

Wrap and eject bale and makesmaller bale the next time.

Overfill Clutch improperlyadjusted.

Readjust Clutch mechanism andlinkage.

STARTING THE BALE

Difficulty is encountered instarting the bale to rotate.

RPM too high. Reduce the PTO RPM to 300 on540 RPM Balers and 700 RPM on1000 RPM Balers.

Packing Roller too slippery. Install Packing Roller Lagging Kit.

Material is NOT being fed inuniformly.

Feed crop evenly until bale hasstarted to rotate.

Material is extremely dry and wind-rows are too small, making it impos-sible for a sufficient amount of ma-terial to get into the Bale Chamberquick enough to start the core rol-ling.

Increase the windrow size by com-bining windrows. Use Shuttle Stopsto provide slackened Belts duringcore formation.

Material wraps on Packing Roller. Bale Starter does NOT drop down. Lubricate all of the pivots on theBale Starter assembly. Leave PTOrunning while closing Gate.

Material has too high a moisturecontent.

Stop baling and wait for material todry.

Baling below 50% moisture whenmaking balage.

Bale at moisture levels between50% and 70%.

WRAPPING & EJECTING BALE

Twine falls off left edge of bale. Twine Tube is being extended toofar to the left.

Adjust Twine Arm Stop.

Twine improperly wrappedaround the bale.

When starting to wrap the bale withTwine, place two wraps of Twine atthe center of the bale to secure theTwine on the bale.

Bale improperly formed. Feed more material on the edges ofthe bale on the next bale formed;see “Baling” topic in Operationchapter.

Page 112: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

907520/CP0600 110 Printed in U.S.A.

WRAPPING & EJECTING BALE (cont.)

Twine will NOT start into the bale. Twine not routed properly. Reroute.

Insufficient amount of material isbeing fed in with twine.

Feed in more material.

Twine tails not long enough Adjust Clamp Jaw Rod.

Twine itself is excessively kinky;poorly made or wet.

Change the type of twine.

Twine prematurely slipping out ofClamp Jaws.

Deburr the edges of the ClampJaws, and/or increase the Springtension on the Clamp Jaws.

Twine will not be placed on the leftside of the Baler.

Obstruction in path of Twine Arm. Remove obstruction.

Feeding too much crop whenstarting twine.

Reduce amount of crop.

Twine will NOT cut. Clamp Jaws will NOT latch openproperly.

Twine Arm is NOT being extendedfar enough to the left side and/orSpring Slide Rod adjustment is toolong.

Clamp Jaw Spring tension is tootight.

Readjust tension; seeAdjustments chapter.

Twine Knife NOT sharp. Sharpen or replace Knife.

Gate will NOT open. Gate Latch improperly adjusted. Readjust Gate Latch; seeAdjustments chapter.

Improper hydraulics connections. Check, repair or replaceconnections.

Gate Cylinder seals bad. Replace seals.

Tractor has faulty hydraulics. Refer to tractor manual for repair.

Bale will NOT fall out of Baler whenbaling cornstalks or haylage.

Bale Ramps stop bale from falling. Remove Bale Ramps.

Twine breaks when bale hitsground.

Insufficient number of wraps forsize of bale and type of Twine.

Increase number of wraps orreduce the size of the next bale.

Twine is being cut between 8″roller and Packing Roller.

Maintain clearance of 1/4″ (6 mm)above rods.

Page 113: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 111 907520/CP0600

AUTOMATIC TWINE WRAP SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTINGNOTE: This Troubleshooting guide presents problems, causes and suggested remedies beyond theextent of loose, worn or missing parts and it was developed with the understanding that the machine is inotherwise good operating condition. BE SURE to exercise the MANDATORY SAFETY SHUTDOWN PRO-CEDURE (see page 10) BEFORE making any adjustments or repairs.

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

System will not power up at all. Poor connection with WiringHarness at tractor power source.

Check for poor connections orbroken wires in Power Harness.Repair any bare or broken wiresin Harness.

Blown fuse in Baler powerHarness.

Replace with 20 amp automotivetype fuse.

The word “SET” appears in theControl Box Digital Display whileoperating in the AUTO mode.

Twine Arm is not in “park” (home)position.

1. Switch the Mode Switch toMANUAL.

2. Using the Actuator Switch,RETRACT the Twine Arm to the“park” position.

3. Switch the Mode Switch back toAUTO.

Twine Arm Position (Channel 5)setting is too high.

Check Channel 5 on the Display.If the reading is above 5.0 for amodel 1475 Baler:

1. Using the DECREASE Switch,change the setting to 5.0 orlower.

2. Switch the Mode Switch toMANUAL.

3. Using the EXTEND/RETRACTSwitch, RETRACT the TwineArm to the “park” position.

4. Switch the Mode Switch back toAUTO.If the reading is below 5.5, doSteps 2 through 4, only.If the problem continues, seeyour dealer.

Insufficient power to the ControlBox.

The system requires a minimum of11 volts D.C. and 20 amps tooperate. Check all powerconnections and power source.

The word “tIE” is continuouslydisplayed in the Control BoxDigital Display while operating inthe AUTO mode.

Twine Arm is not in “park” (home)position.

1. Switch the Mode Switch toMANUAL

2. Using the EXTEND/RETRACTKey, RETRACT the Twine Armto the “park” position.

3. Switch the Mode Switch back toAUTO.

End Wrap Pause Switch is notadjusted properly.

Refer to the End Wrap PauseSwitch Adjustment topic in theOperator’s Manual.

Page 114: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

907520/CP0600 112 Printed in U.S.A.

AUTOMATIC TWINE WRAP SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING (Cont.)

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

The word “tIE” is continuouslydisplayed in the Control BoxDigital Display while operating inthe AUTO mode. (Continued)

Faulty Harness. Check for continuity in Harness.

End Wrap Pause Switch is faulty. Check for faulty End Wrap PauseSwitch; Switch must close as theMagnet passes by.

Tie system will not startautomatically.

Mode Switch is set to MANUAL. Set Mode Switch Fig. 30, Ref. 1 toAUTO.

Trip Magnet is not activating theBale Size Switch.

As the bale grows to the desiredsize, the Trip Magnet MUSTslide within 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) ofthe Bale Size Switch (3/16–3/8inch (4.8–9.5 mm) on Early StyleBaler Control). If necessary,adjust Magnet to proper locationin slot and make sure the Switchis mounted in the properlocation. Refer to theAdjustments chapter.

Bale Size Switch is faulty. Check for faulty Bale Size Switch;Switch must close when theMagnet is near the Switch.

Tailgate OPEN/CLOSEDIndicators do not function onDigital Display.

The Magnet on the Tailgate SwitchAssembly is not properlyadjusted.

Adjust the Magnet on the TailgateSwitch Assembly so that itpasses within 3/32 inch (2.4mm) from the Switch.

Tailgate Switch is faulty. Check for faulty Tailgate Switch;Switch must close as theMagnet passes by.

Tailgate “OPEN” “GATE” messagecontinues to flash on DigitalDisplay after a bale has beendischarged.

The Magnet on the Tailgate SwitchAssembly is not properlyadjusted.

Adjust the Magnet on the TailgateSwitch Assembly so that itpasses within 3/32 inch (2.4mm) from the Switch.

Tailgate Switch is faulty. Check for faulty Tailgate Switch;Switch must close as theMagnet passes by.

Page 115: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 113 907520/CP0600

AUTOMATIC BALE CONTROL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTINGNOTE: This Troubleshooting guide presents problems, causes and suggested remedies beyond theextent of loose, worn or missing parts and it was developed with the understanding that the machine is inotherwise good operating condition. BE SURE to exercise the MANDATORY SAFETY SHUTDOWN PRO-CEDURE (page 10), BEFORE making any adjustments or repairs.

BALE WRAPPING IMPROPERLY

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Bale size is inconsistent. Bale size sensor is not adjustedcorrectly (Fig. 83) or Jam Nuts areloose.

The air gap between the tip of theBale Size Sensor to the SprocketTooth should be adjusted to 0.1 to0.12″ (2.5 to 3 mm).

Friction Block not adjustedproperly; too loose.

The Friction Block is to clamp onthe sprocket Hub so as to create3-4 in-lb (0.34–0.45 Nm) of dragwhen rotated up and down be-tween stops.

Cab Module display powers up fora few seconds and then shuts off.

Power is not reaching theImplement Module.

The power cord between the tractorand the Baler is not properlyconnected.

Repair broken wire or poor connec-tion between tractor power sourceand Implement Module.

Faulty Implement Module.See dealer.

System will not power up at all. Poor connection with WiringHarness at tractor power source.

Check for poor connections orbroken wires in Power Harness.

Blown fuse in Baler power Harness. Replace with 20 amp automotivetype fuse. Check for and repair anybare or broken wires in Harness.

Page 116: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

907520/CP0600 114 Printed in U.S.A.

BALE WRAPPING IMPROPERLY (cont.)

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

The system starts before bale hasreached programmed bale size.

Friction Block is not adjusted correctly. The Friction Block is to clamp on theSprocket Hub so as to create 3-4 in-lb (0.34–0.45 Nm) of drag when ro-tated up and down between stops.

Spacer/Magnet Assembly (locatedabove left TDC Cylinder and to therear of the Shuttle Return Switch) isset too close to Switch. Note: Thisassembly acts as an overall protec-tion and starts the tie system beforethe Pickup assembly declutches.

Refer to the Shuttle Return Switchtopic in the Adjustments Chapter.

Clamp/Magnet Assembly locatedabove left TDC Cylinder is not mov-ing away from Shuttle ReturnSwitch when TDC Cylinder is ex-tended.

Clamp/Magnet Assembly is to beclamped on square tube and shouldrequire 4 lbs. (18 N) of force to slideon tube.

Spacer/Magnet Assembly (locatedabove the left TDC Cylinder to therear of the Shuttle Return Switch) isnot moving away from the ShuttleReturn Switch.

Free the Spacer/Magnet Assemblyfrom the Shuttle Return Switch. TheSpacer/Magnet Assembly shouldtravel back and forth with thesquare tube located above the TDCCylinder. The back and forth move-ment occurs as the TDC CylinderRod extends and retracts.

Shuttle Return Switch stuck in“closed” position.

To check for a faulty Shuttle ReturnSwitch, separate Harness at Con-nector near the Switch. CheckSwitch continuity (using an ohmme-ter or equivalent) by placing the tes-ter leads on each Terminal of theLeads coming from the Switch.Whenever the Magnet in the matingpart comes close to the Switch, theSwitch should close. As the Magnetmoves away from the Switch, theSwitch should open.

Wires in Harness related to ShuttleReturn Switch are short circuited.

Check Wiring Harness for barewires. Separate Harness at Con-nector near Switch. With a volt/ohmmeter check the voltage acrossthe two Terminals in the Harnessend of the Connector. When theControl System is on, the voltageshould be 5 volts DC.

Page 117: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 115 907520/CP0600

ERROR MESSAGE EXPLANATIONSOne of the functions of the Tractor Module is to displaythe conditions of the Bale Wrap system, both in thestages of normal and proper operation and also inrecognition of errors, failures and faults. Potential ErrorMessage codes are listed in the beginning of this chapter.

E 1 - Out of Twine/Only One Twineon Bale (Twine Tie System ONLY)

NOTE: The following information is developedin consideration of the Wrap System known to becorrectly set up, properly wired and interconnectedand operated in the “AUTOmatic” mode.

For whatever reason, if the Twine Wrap system twineruns out, an E1 error message will be given and thefollowing action should be taken:

Check for Causeof Error – See E1 Troubleshooting

Guide

If Wrap MaterialStarts, Resume

Normal Operation

Push ENTER toSilence Beeper

Feed in SmallAmount of Crop

to Get TwineStarted

Push CYCLE toRepeat Tie Cycle

Push ENTER toRe-activate System

Exercise the MANDATORYSAFETY SHUTDOWN PROCE-

DURE ∗ & Power-down theWrap Control System

Reconnect PTO& Hydraulic Hoses,

Restart TractorEngine &

Power-up WrapControl System

∗ Refer to SAFETY chapter of Baler Operator’s Manual for details.

Twine Arm Stopsat Right Side End

Wrap PausePosition Eject Bale Wrapped with Only

One Twine & Continue Baling,if Desired

E1 Troubleshooting Guide1. Check twine supply and replenish if required.2. Check if twine is broken, hooked, or pinched. Re-

pair twine break and check to see if twine is routedproperly.

3. Check that twine did not come off Twine Wheels.Reinstall if required. Adjust Twine Keeper, if re-quired.

4. If E1 error is displayed just as Twine Arm comesto Home Position:a. The End Wrap Pause Switch is not adjusted

correctly. Need to advance the Cam/PausePlate. See the End Wrap Pause Switch topicin the Adjustments Chapter.

b. Faulty End Wrap Pause Switch. To check

for a faulty Switch, separate Harness at Con-nector near the Switch. Check the Switchcontinuity (using an ohmmeter or equiva-lent) by placing the tester leads on each Ter-minal of the Leads coming from the Switch.Whenever the Magnet in the mating partcomes close to the Switch, the Switchshould close. As the Magnet moves awayfrom the Switch, the Switch should open.

c. Check Wiring Harness for breaks or looseconnections. Separate Harness at Connectornear Switch. With a volt/ohmmeter, checkthe voltage across the two Terminals in theHarness end of the Connector. When theControl System is on, the voltage should be5 volts DC.

Page 118: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

907520/CP0600 116 Printed in U.S.A.

E 2 - Out of Netting(Quick Wrap System ONLY)

For whatever reason, if the Quick Wrap system nettingruns out, the Actuator will return HOME and an E2 errormessage will be given. The following action should betaken:

When nettingstarts, normal

operation can beresumed

Push ENTER toSilence Beeper

Push CYCLE torepeat Wrap

Material feeding attempt

Exercise theMANDATORY

SAFETYSHUTDOWN

PROCEDURE ∗& Power-down

the WrapControl System

Reconnect PTO& Hydraulic Hoses& restart tractor

engine &Power-up WrapControl System

∗ Refer to SAFETY chapter of Baler Operator’s Manual for details.

Push CYCLE twotimes to find outthe % of nettingused from roll.

If new roll of nettingis installed, reset %

of Netting bypressing CYCLE

two times; onsecond time, hold

CYCLE for 5seconds until “0”appears in display

∗∗

∗∗As desired, attempt wrapping again or stop here and eject bale.

Push ENTER toRe-activate System

Check E2Troubleshooting

Guide

Actuator returns toHome Position

E2 Troubleshooting Guide

1. Check net supply and refill if required.

2. Check for torn netting:

a. Brake is too tight. See operator‘s manualfor brake adjustment.

b. Netting is not routed properly. Check forproper net routing.

c. Net roll does not rotate freely in storageposition. Remove obstruction.

d. Check for other foreign objects that mightcause the roll of netting to rotate hard or notat all.

3. Pinch Count Switch and Magnet not functioningproperly (Quick Wrap Only). Check the PinchCount Switch located on the right side of the rub-ber Pinch Roller on the Quick Wrap. To check for

a faulty Switch, separate Harness at Connectornear the Switch. Check the Switch continuity (us-ing an ohmmeter or equivalent) by placing the tes-ter leads on each Terminal of the Leads comingfrom the Switch. Whenever the Magnet in themating part comes close to the Switch, the Switchshould close. As the Magnet moves away from theSwitch, the Switch should open. The air gap be-tween the plastic collar and the switch should be1/16″ (1.6 mm).

4. Check Wiring Harness for breaks or loose connec-tions. Separate Harness at Connector near Switch.With a volt/ohmmeter, check the voltage acrossthe two Terminals in the Harness end of the Con-nector. When the Control System is on, the voltageshould be 5 volts DC.

5. Replace any broken parts. Remove any obstaclesand rethread the netting outlined in the procedureon the Decal provided on the Quick Wrap.

Page 119: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 117 907520/CP0600

E 3 - Twine/Netting NOT Started

Reconnect PTO& Hydraulic Hoses& restart tractor

engine &Power-up WrapControl System

∗∗

The Circular CYCLE LightWill Continue to Flash for

Approximately 15 SecondsOR Until Both Twines or theNetting Has Started Feedingon the Bale. If the WrappingMaterial Does NOT Start andan E3 Error appears, the Ac-

tuator Will Return to theHome Position

Push ENTER toSilence Beeper

For Twine TieSystem ONLY,feed in small

amount of cropto try to get

twine to start

Exercise theMANDATORY

SAFETYSHUTDOWN

PROCEDURE ∗& Power down

the WrapControl System

CHECK E3TROUBLESHOOTING

GUIDE

For Twine TieSystems only,the Tie System

works best if thecycle is started

with hay.

CHECK E3TROUBLESHOOTING

GUIDE

If WrapMaterial starts,

normal operationcan be resumed

If Wrap Materialdoes NOT start,

System willTime out & E3

Error will appear

Push ENTER toSilence Beeper

Push CYCLE torepeat Wrap

Material feeding attempt

Push ENTER toconfirm cycle

command

∗ Refer to SAFETY chapter of BalerOperator’s Manual for details.∗∗ As desired, attempt wrapping againor stop here and eject bale.

Page 120: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

907520/CP0600 118 Printed in U.S.A.

E3 Troubleshooting Guide

NOTE: E3 only appears if both twines or the netfail to wrap on the bale. System will successfullywrap bale with only one twine.

1. Check for depletion of wrapping material.

2. Wrapping material not routed correctly from stor-age location to discharge location. Check manualfor correct routing.

3. Twine tail(s) not long enough (twine only). Checkoperator’s manual for correct twine jaw adjust-ment.

4. Net not starting (Quick Wrap Only). See QuickWrap troubleshooting section.

5. Pinch Count Switch and Magnet not functioningproperly (Quick Wrap Only). Check the PinchCount Switch located on the right side of the rub-ber Pinch Roller on the Quick Wrap. To check fora faulty switch, separate Harness at Connectornear the Switch. Check the Switch continuity (us-ing an ohmmeter or equivalent) by placing the tes-ter leads on each Terminal of the Leads comingfrom the Switch. Whenever the Magnet on themating part comes close to the Switch, the Switchshould close. As the Magnet moves away from theSwitch, the Switch should open. The air gap be-tween the plastic collar and the switch should be1/16″ (1.6 mm).

6. Check Wiring Harness for breaks or loose connec-tions. Separate Harness at Connector near Switch.With a volt/ohmmeter, check the voltage acrossthe two Terminals in the Harness end of the Con-nector. When the Control System is on, the voltageshould be 5 volts DC.

7. Both twines visually appear to be started but E3reoccurs:

a. Check that the twine has not jumped off theTwine Wheel.

b. Check for faulty Twine Wheel Switch. Spin-ning both the Right and Left Twine Wheelsindependently by hand, should cause an E7to appear on the Cab Module Display. If E7does not occur, check for faulty Switch ormissing Magnet in Twine Wheel. To checkfor a faulty Switch, separate Harness at Con-nector near the Switch. Check the Switchcontinuity (using an ohmmeter or equiva-lent) by placing the tester leads on each Ter-minal of the Leads coming from the Switch.Whenever the Magnet on the mating partcomes close to the Switch, the Switchshould close. As the Magnet moves awayfrom the Switch, the Switch should open.

c. Check Wiring Harness for breaks or looseconnections. Separate Harness at Connectornear Switch. With a volt/ohmmeter, checkthe voltage across the two Terminals in theHarness end of the Connector. When theControl System is on, the voltage should be5 volts DC.

8. Bad wiring harness or poor connection: if bothsteps 5 and 6 check out OK, check out circuit forbare or broken wires or a loose connection.

9. Quick Wrap only. Check for trash in the net knifearea. Also check that the Knife Carrier is being ro-tated away from the cutoff position and driving theSprague Clutch. See net wrap troubleshootingsection.

Page 121: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 119 907520/CP0600

E 5 - Twine Arm Obstruction(Twine Tie System ONLY)NOTE: Twine may or may NOT have started;Twine Arm may return HOME automatically de-pending on whether Arm was moving out fromHOME or moving back to HOME.

On a Twine Tie system only, an E5 error message couldpotentially occur, due to an obstruction in the path of theTwine Arm. The following action should be taken:

If WrapMaterial starts,

normal operationcan be resumed

Push ENTER toSilence Beeper

Feed in small amount of crop

to try to gettwine to start

Push CYCLE torepeat Wrap

Material feeding attempt

Push ENTER toconfirm cycle

command

Exercise theMANDATORY

SAFETYSHUTDOWN

PROCEDURE ∗& Power-down

the WrapControl System

Reconnect PTO& Hydraulic Hoses& restart tractor

engine &Power-up WrapControl System

∗∗

∗ Refer to SAFETY chapter of Baler Operator’s Manual for details.

∗∗ As desired, attempt wrapping again or stop here and eject bale.

CHECK E5TROUBLE-SHOOTING

GUIDE

Check that twineis in the Clamps

Manually returnTwine Arm to

Home Position

Page 122: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

907520/CP0600 120 Printed in U.S.A.

E5 Troubleshooting Guide

1. Check for and remove any visible obstructions.

2. If windrows are very large, the Windguard can beforced into the path of the Twine Arm. Slow downground speed when full bale signal is given to re-duce the amount of crop going into the baler.

3. If E5 is displayed when the Twine Arm travelscompletely to the left side of the baler withoutpausing and then returns home:

a. The End Wrap Pause Switch is closing toolate. See manual for End Wrap Pause Switchadjustment.

b. End Wrap Pause Switch is sticking open. Tocheck for a faulty Switch, separate Harnessat Connector near the Switch. Check theSwitch continuity (using an ohmmeter orequivalent) by placing the tester leads oneach Terminal of the Leads coming from theSwitch. Whenever Magnet on the matingpart comes close to the Switch, the Switchshould close. As the Magnet moves awayfrom the Switch, the Switch should open.

c. Check Wiring Harness for breaks or looseconnections. Separate Harness at Connectornear Switch. With a volt/ohmmeter, checkthe voltage across the two Terminals in theHarness end of the Connector. When theControl System is on, the voltage should be5 volts DC.

d. The gap between the End Wrap PauseSwitch and magnet is too great. The air gapshould be 1/16 to 3/32″ (1.6–3.2 mm).

e. Twine Arm Stop Bolt (Fig. 66), used forstalling Actuator when applying end wrapsto left side of bale, is extended out too far.The Twine Arm Linkage is striking the StopBolt before allowing Twine Arm to pause atpause position.

f. Reset the Control System by disconnectingpower to the Implement Module. This canbe done by disconnecting the Power Chordbetween the Baler and tractor or by remov-ing and reinserting the Fuse in the BalerPower Harness.

4. If E5 is displayed when Twine Arm stalls at HomePosition:

a. The End Wrap Pause Switch is opening toolate. See manual for End Wrap Pause Switchadjustment.

b. Faulty End Wrap Pause Switch. To checkfor a faulty Switch, separate Harness at Con-nector near the Switch. Check the Switchcontinuity (using an ohmmeter or equiva-lent) by placing the tester leads on each Ter-minal of the Leads coming from the Switch.Whenever the Magnet on the mating partcomes close to the Switch, the Switchshould close. As the Magnet moves awayfrom the Switch, the Switch should open.

c. Check Wiring Harness for breaks or looseconnections. Separate Harness at Connectornear Switch. With a volt/ohmmeter, checkthe voltage across the two Terminals in theHarness end of the Connector. When theControl System is on, the voltage should be5 volts DC.

5. If E5 is displayed when Twine Arm stalls or hitsan obstruction while in the extending mode:

a. The Twine Arm will automatically return toHome Position.

b. Exercise the Safety Shutdown and removeobstruction.

c. Cycle tie system again.

NOTE: If Twine Arm encounters an obstructionbetween the pause position and the left side of theBaler, it will continue its normal wrapping opera-tion. However, the left portion of the bale will not bewrapped. This is usually caused by crops being fedinto the Baler too heavy while starting the twine.Slow down or stop ground speed when full bale sig-nal is given.

6. If E5 is displayed when Twine Arm stalls while inretracting position:

a. System switches to manual mode and TwineArm remains where obstruction occurred.Operator may have to manually control theTwine Arm away from the obstruction.

b. Remove obstruction.

c. Return Twine Arm to Home Position.

Page 123: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 121 907520/CP0600

E 6 - Shuttle NOT Returned If the Tailgate closes but the Shuttle does NOT return,the Wrap system will do a self-analysis and, after 7seconds delay, an E6 error message will be given. Thefollowing action should be taken:

Push ENTER toSilence Beeper

Exercise theMANDATORY

SAFETYSHUTDOWN

PROCEDURE ∗& Power-down

the WrapControl System

∗ Refer to SAFETY chapter of Baler Operator’s Manual for details.

To Clear E6 fromDisplay, operate thetractor hydraulics to

open the Baler Tailgate. Next,

engage the PTO.Then, slowly

close and Latch Tailgate.

If the Systembeeps and the GO

Arrow appears,normal operationcan be resumed

If GO Arrowdoes NOT

appear, continue with

next steps.

To Clear E6 fromDisplay, operate thetractor hydraulics to

open the BalerTailgate. Next,

engage the PTO.Then, slowly

close and latchthe Tailgate.

The Systemshould beep, theGO Arrow should

appear andnormal operationcan be resumed.

Push ENTER toSilence Beeper

Check E6Troubleshooting

Guide

Reconnect PTO& Hydraulic Hoses& restart tractor

engine &Power-up WrapControl System

E6 Troubleshooting Guide

1. Check for twisted belts, or belt hooked on baleramps.

2. Shuttle hanging up or shuttle locks engaged.

3. Check TDC system for correct air pressure and oillevel. See manual for correct settings.

4. Check shuttle return switch so that trash is not ob-structing the trip magnet.

5. Check that Friction Block with Magnet is properlypositioned against Shuttle Switch.

6. Check for faulty Shuttle Return Switch. To checkfor a faulty Switch, separate Harness at Connectornear the Switch. Check the Switch continuity (us-

ing an ohmmeter or equivalent) by placing the tes-ter leads on each Terminal of the Leads comingfrom the Switch. Whenever the Magnet in themating part comes close to the Switch, the Switchshould close. As the Magnet moves away from theSwitch, the Switch should open.

7. Check Wiring Harness for breaks or loose connec-tions. Separate Harness at Connector near Switch.With a volt/ohmmeter, check the voltage acrossthe two Terminals in the Harness end of the Con-nector. When the Control System is on, the voltageshould be 5 volts DC.

8. Control system was not powered down before in-terrupting electrical power to the Baler (ie. start-ing tractor). This is important if a partial bale is inthe Baler.

Page 124: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

907520/CP0600 122 Printed in U.S.A.

E 7 - False Start for Wrap MaterialNOTE: This error message may occur at anytime during normal baling.

If the twine starts prior to the tie cycle, an E7 errormessage will be given. The following action should betaken:

Resume baling iferror message

does not reoccur

Shut OffPTO

Push ENTER toSilence Beeper

Exercise theMANDATORY

SAFETYSHUTDOWN

PROCEDURE ∗& Power-down

the WrapControl System

Power-up WrapControl System

∗∗

∗ Refer to SAFETY chapter of Baler Operator’s Manual for details.

Inspect the Systemcomponents making surethat the twine or netting

is NOT wrapping onthe Pickup, Rolls, Drive

components or other areas.As necessary, remove any

excess wrap material.

For Twine TieSystem ONLY,check that thetwine is in theClamps and

check the Knifefor frayed twine

on the Knife

Reconnect PTO& Hydraulic Hoses& restart tractor

engine

∗∗As desired, resume baling or wrapping.

E7 Troubleshooting Guide1. Inspect twine jaws to see if they are loose and

working freely. (Twine Only)2. Be sure that twine is routed correctly.

Page 125: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 123 907520/CP0600

E 8 - End Wrap Pause (EWP)Faulty or Misadjusted(Twine Tie System ONLY)NOTE: When this error message occurs, theTwine Arm will return Home automatically.

On a Twine Tie system only, an E8 error message couldpotentially occur, due to the End Wrap Pause (EWP)Switch being out of adjustment or faulty. The followingaction should be taken:

Reconnect PTO& Hydraulic Hoses& restart tractor

engine &Power-up WrapControl System

∗∗

Push ENTER toSilence Beeper

Exercise theMANDATORY

SAFETYSHUTDOWN

PROCEDURE ∗& Power-down

the WrapControl System

Detach and unplug theScrew Plug from thetractor harness to theBaler power cord. Thisis located at the rear ofthe tractor. This should

reset the systemparameters. Then,

re-connect the Plug.

Press CYCLE

Feed in smallamount of crop

to get thetwine to start.Then, resumenormal baling.

Push ENTER toRe-activate System

∗ Refer to SAFETY chapter of Baler Operator’s Manual for details.

∗∗As desired, attempt wrapping again or stop here and eject bale.

Check E8Troubleshooting Guide

Twine Arm willreturn to Home

Position

E8 Troubleshooting Guide1. If the Twine Arm hits an obstruction and stalls

prior to the closing of the End Wrap Pause, an E8will be displayed. Remove the obstruction.

2. E8 is displayed when Twine Arm travels uninter-rupted to the left side of the Baler. The Switch isnot closing due to misadjustment or a faultySwitch. To check for a faulty Switch, separateHarness at Connector near the Switch. Check theSwitch continuity (using an ohmmeter or equiva-lent) by placing the tester leads on each Terminal

of the Leads coming from the Switch. Wheneverthe Magnet in the mating part comes close to theSwitch, the Switch should close. As the Magnetmoves away from the Switch, the Switch shouldopen.

3. Check Wiring Harness for breaks or loose connec-tions. Separate Harness at Connector near Switch.With a volt/ohmmeter, check the voltage acrossthe two Terminals in the Harness end of the Con-nector. When the Control System is on, the voltageshould be 5 volts DC.

Page 126: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

907520/CP0600 124 Printed in U.S.A.

E 9 - Twine NOT Cut off(Twine Tie System ONLY)

On a Twine Tie system only, an E9 error message willoccur when the twine does NOT cut off. When thisoccurs, the following action should be taken:

Push ENTER toSilence Beeper

Exercise theMANDATORY

SAFETYSHUTDOWN

PROCEDURE ∗& Power-down

the WrapControl System

If twine is NOTcut, inspect theKnife Clampsand Blade for

frayed material,dull knife edge

or improper clamp tension. Check if twineis in the twine clamp.

If not, place in clamps.

Reconnect PTO& Hydraulic Hoses& restart tractor

engine &Power-up WrapControl System

∗ Refer to SAFETY chapter of Baler Operator’s Manual for details.

Shut OffPTO

Page 127: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 125 907520/CP0600

E 10 - Low Voltage/Low AmperageThe E10 Error Message usually occurs when the

actuators are put in motion because of the additionalcurrent draw.

Push ENTER toSilence Beeper

Restart Tractor Engine andPower Up the Control

System

Check for Cause of Error andCorrect Problem – See E10

Troubleshooting Guide

Exercise the MANDATORYSAFETY SHUTDOWN

PROCEDURE ∗ & Power-down the Wrap Control

System

Press the MANUAL/AUTOKey to Switch to ManualMode and then Press the

ENTER Key

Manually Wrapthe Bale

Eject the Bale,Close the Tailgateand Wait for the

“GO” Arrow

When “GO” Ar-row Appears,Switch to theAUTO Mode Press the MANUAL/AUTO

Key and then the ENTERKey

E10 Troubleshooting Guide

1. Check for poor connection at power source.

2. Power harness for the control system is not con-nected to an adequate power source. Connectpower harness directly to battery or power sourcethat is capable of supplying 17 amps at 12 volts.

3. Using an intermediate harness or wiring betweenthe power cord and the power source should

be 10 gauge wiring or greater and capable ofsupplying 17 amps at 12 volts. If at all possible,an intermediate wiring harness should be avoided.

4. Check integrity of the tractor electrical system. IfE10 appears while starting tractor engine, it maybe an indication of battery weakening. Check wa-ter level in the batteries. Check wiring harnessconnections at power source for corrosion or poorconnections. If problem persists, check chargingsystem and battery strength.

Page 128: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

907520/CP0600 126 Printed in U.S.A.

QUICK WRAP (NET) SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTINGNOTE: This Troubleshooting guide presents problems, causes and suggested remedies beyond theextent of loose, worn or missing parts and it was developed with the understanding that the machine is inotherwise good operating condition. BE SURE to exercise the MANDATORY SAFETY SHUTDOWN PRO-CEDURE (page 10), BEFORE making any adjustments or repairs.

BALE WRAPPING IMPROPERLY

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

The desired number of wraps isNOT being obtained.

The Drive Roller Switch is NOToperating correctly.

Check that Roller Switch closes whenMagnet passes by.

The Drive Roller tension isincorrect.

Readjust the Drive Roller tension.

Netting NOT started on DriveRollers.

Start netting on Roller per instructionson Decal.

Frequent bending of FeederFingers.

Tailgate Roller too close to FloorRoller.

Move Tailgate Roller back away fromFloor Roller approximately 1-1/2″ (37mm) from Tailgate Roller to the rib ofthe Floor Roller.

Feeder Fingers NOT adjustedproperly.

Readjust Feeder Finger positions withBaler empty and Gate against stops.

Trash accumulation. Remove trash accumulated insideBale Forming Belts before the bot-tom Tailgate Roller.

Bale is NOT being wrappeduniformly.

Foreign material or crop buildup onthe Feeder Fingers.

Remove any buildup and readjustthe Finger positions, as required.

Belts NOT tracking correctly. Readjust the Belt tension and/ortracking per the information in thisSupplement.

Rewrap Bar NOT locked down. Lock Bar in “DOWN” position.

An incorrect number of wraps isbeing placed on the bale.

Readjust the wrap control to obtainat least two wraps.

Foreign material, crop or wrapmaterial buildup on the Rollersor Belts.

Carefully and properly remove crop orwrap material from Rollers and/orreadjust Feeder Belt tension, as re-quired.

Netting NOT routed properly. Properly route Netting perinstructions at the beginning ofthis Supplement.

The roll of Netting material is toonarrow or of inadequate quality.

Contact your Gehl dealer. Use ONLYGehl approved wrap material.

Tear in the wrap material on bale. Rough edges or burrs on TailgateRoller.

File off rough edges.

Burrs on the Feeder Fingers. Remove the burrs with a file.

Rubber Ramp Shield NOT coveringBale Ramps.

Reposition or replace Ramp Shield.

Feeder Finger snagging Nettingwhen bale rolls out of Baler.

Open Tailgate quicker.

Page 129: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 13 – Troubleshooting

Printed in U.S.A. 127 907520/CP0600

BALE WRAPPING IMPROPERLY (cont.)

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Tear in the wrap material on bale(cont.).

Improperly adjusted or pluggedFeeder Fingers.

Readjust Feeder Finger positions.

Belts NOT tracking properly. Readjust Feeder Belt tracking orreinstall Feeder Fingers on left sideof their mounting Tabs.

The Knife retracts to the “Cutoff”position but does NOT cut thematerial.

The Knife edge has become dull. Remove the Knife, sharpen it andreplace it.

Netting follows Bale Forming Beltsup the front of the Baler instead ofwrapping Bale.

Lacing Cables exposed. Re-lace main Baler belts andreplace any lacing hooks.

Blemish (cut or fray) in belt. Repair Belt. Add Net Stripping Kit,as described in Optional FeaturesChapter.

BALE NOT WRAPPED

PROBLEM CAUSE REMEDY

Feeder Belts stop turning or slip. Feeder Belt tension too loose. Readjust Feeder Belt tension.

Wrap material wraps around DriveRollers.

Rear Net Guide too close to RubberDrive Roller.

Readjust Guide Roller.

Too much wrap material is beingindexed into Net Chute when startingNet Roll.

Install the wrap material per theinstructions on the Decal. BE SUREto avoid rotating the wrapping materi-al Roll more than 1 revolution.

Pinch Rollers damaged. NEVER cut the Rubber Roller with aknife when attempting to removewrapped material. Smooth off dam-aged areas with a file; it may be nec-essary to replace the Rubber Roller.

Sticky material on Rubber DriveRoller.

Clean the Roller.

Wrap material not reaching Bale atLower Tailgate Roller.

Feeder Finger NOT properlyadjusted.

Readjust Feeder Finger positions.

Trash accumulation. Remove trash accumulation insideBale Forming Belts by bottomTailgate Roller.

Page 130: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 128 Printed in U.S.A.

CHAPTER 14SET-UP & ASSEMBLY

The Baler is shipped with the following parts NOTattached to the Main unit:

– Wheels & Tires

– Bale Ramp Shields (Quick Wrap Models)

– Bale Ramps

– Tractor Controls and Control Cables

– Hose & Cable Support

WHEELS & TIRES

The Baler may be shipped from the factory withoutWheels and Tires mounted. Install the Tires and Rims;torque the Wheel Nuts to 90 ft-lb (124 N-m). Inflate theTires to 40 PSI (280 kPa). Refer to the Wheels & Tirestopic at the end of the Service chapter for additionalinformation.

IMPLEMENT PTO

Installation of the PTO is covered in the Preparing forField Operation chapter.

BALE RAMPS (Fig. 128)

The Bale Ramps and mounting hardware are packedloose in the Twine Box. Install each of the (2) BaleRamps to the Axle mounted Ramp Anchors securingeach with (4) 1/2 x 1-1/4″ Cap Screws, Lock Washersand Nuts. Several mounting positions are available toallow compensation for various crop and field condi-tions.

BALE RAMP SHIELDS &BALE RAMPS (QUICK WRAPMODELS ONLY) (Fig. 128)

The Bale Ramp Shields and mounting hardware arepacked loose in the Twine Box. Installation is asfollows:

1. Remove the (4) 1/2 x 5″ Cap Screws and 1/2″ LockNuts that secure the (2) Ramp Anchor Assembliesand retain.

2. Install a Ramp Shield to the back of each RampAnchor Assembly securing with the retained (4)1/2 x 5″ Cap Screws, 1/2″ Lock Nuts and adding(4) 1/2″ Flat Washers as shown in Fig. 128.

3. Install each of the (2) Bale Ramps to the Axlemounted Ramp Anchors securing each with (2)1/2 x 1-1/4″ Cap Screws, Lock Washers and Nuts.Several mounting positions are available to allowcompensation for various crop and field condi-tions.

4. Roll the Ramp Shields over the Ramps and secureeach using a Hold Down Strap, (2) 1/2 x 1-1/4″Cap Screws, Lock Washers and Nuts.

1 – Ramp (2)2 – Ramp Shield (2)3 – Hold Down Strap4 – 1/2 x 5″ Cap Screw (4)5 – 1/2 Lock Nut (4)6 – Flat Washer (4)7 – 1/2 x 1-1/4″ Cap Screw (8)8 – Lock Washer (8)9 – Nut (8)

Fig. 128

��

�!

!

�"�

HOSE & CABLE SUPPORTAttach the Hose & Cable Support to the right front faceof the Hitch securing with (2) 5/8 x 2″ Cap Screws, (2)5/8″ Flat Washers and Lock Washers. MAKE SURE toplace the Flat Washers under the heads of the CapScrews. Route the Hydraulic Hoses, Transport LightingCable and Baler Control Cable through the loop on theHose & Cable Support.

NOTE: To ease assembly, manually extend theTwine Arm for additional clearance.

Page 131: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 14 – Set-up & Assembly

Printed in U.S.A. 129 907520/CP0600

TWINE TIE SYSTEMS

NOTE: The Twine Arm and Actuator comes fullyassembled and mounted on the Baler from thefactory.

Manual Twine Wrap System (Fig. 129)

Tractor Control Box Installation

A Bracket is provided for attaching the Receptacle ontothe tractor. The Bracket should be located on the rear ofthe tractor in a position which prevents the Cable frombeing caught by the PTO.

Appropriate hardware and mounting brackets are pro-vided for attaching the Control Box to a non-supportivemember (such as the cab or a fender) on the tractor. BESURE to locate the Control Box within convenientreach. Make the Red (+) 12-volt and White (-) 12-volttractor battery/ground connections for powering theControl Box. A 20 amp Bus Bar connection is alsoacceptable. Any intermediate wire or harness must beAWG 10 gauge or heavier.

Bale Counter Installation

1. Pop rivet the Bale Counter to the Counter Mount-ing Bracket using the Pop Rivets supplied.

2. Attach one end of the Extension Spring to the BaleCounter Arm closing the loop in the Spring to se-cure.

3. Mount the Counter Assembly to the TDC ValveTrip Mechanism using the existing hardware onthe Baler (TDC Valve Trip Stop Bolt & TDCValve Mounting Bolt).

4. Loosen the TDC Valve Trip Mounting Bolt. At-tach the other end of the Extension Spring to theend of the Bolt facing the front of the Baler and se-cure.

Baler Actuator Cable Installation

1. Remove Windguard to gain access to the TwineArm Actuator.

2. Route Actuator Cable through Cable and HoseSupport, along Hydraulic Hoses, through theHitch Assembly and plugging into the Actuator.Secure the Cable with the Cable Ties provided.

CAUTIONDO NOT secure cable to any moving parts orpinch points.

3. Replace Windguard.

1 – Manual Twine Control Box2 – Control Box Mounting Bracket3 – 1/4 x 3/4 Cap Screw, Lock Washer & Nut4 – Control Box to Implement Receptacle5 – Receptacle Mounting Bracket6 – 1/4 x 1 Cap Screw, Lock Washer & Nut7 – Implement Harness

Fig. 129: Manual Twine Control Parts

8 – Wire Ties9 – Bale Counter

10 – Counter Extension Spring11 – Counter Mounting Bracket (slotted hole to bottom)12 – Pop Rivet13 – Front Plate of TDC Valve Trip

$�%+��,%�� �%#��,%��

!

�"

��

��

��

��

-���

.%#��$���

�����#

.%#��

/�0������#

)�0���/�0������%+1�

Page 132: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 14 – Set-up & Assembly

907520/CP0600 130 Printed in U.S.A.

Automatic Twine Wrap System(Figs. 130 – 133)1. Connect the Power Harness to an adequate power

source that is capable of supplying a minimum of20 Amps at 12 Volts. Connect the RED power leadto the (+) polarity of the power source and theBLACK power lead to the (–) polarity (Ground).

Tractor Control Box Installation

NOTE: If the RED power lead is connected tothe wrong polarity, the system will NOT respond.

2. Avoid using an intermediate harness or wiringmeans between the power source and the PowerHarness supplied with your Gehl Baler.

3. An inline fuse holder is manufactured into theRED (+) positive lead of the Power Harness. Theholder has a 20 Amp spade type automotive fuseinside. For replacement use an equivalent 20 Ampfuse.

4. Route the Power Harness in such a way as to beprotected by its location, but so it does not inter-fere with any other tractor controls or movingparts. Route the female connector end of the Har-ness to the tractor and plug the connector into thebottom of the Control Box. Route the bracket andmale connector assembly to the rear of the tractor.Mount the bracket securely to the back of the trac-

tor in a location that will keep and hold the powercord in a safe operating position.

Baler Shuttle Position/Bale Size SensorInstallation (See Fig. 130)

1. Mount the Shuttle Position/Bale Size Sensor onthe two rear upper Tie Rods of the left TDC Cylin-der securing with two 1/2″ Hex Nuts. MAKESURE to position the Sensor Assembly so theSensor is facing down or towards the rear of themachine.

2. Remove the special Screw, Lock Washer and FlatWashers that retain the Sprocket Assembly at thetop of the left TDC Cylinder. Place the SlideMounting Plate over the exposed Pin and securewith the removed hardware deleting one of theFlat Washers.

3. Pre–assemble the Slide, Strap, Magnet Assem-blies, Magnet Nuts and Nylon Washers as shown.

4. Route the Slide Assembly through the ShuttlePosition/Bale Size Sensor and secure the Assem-bly to the outside of the Plate on the top of the TDCCylinder clevis with a 3/8 x 1″ Cap Screw and 3/8″Nylon Insert Lock Nut. Adjust the Magnet As-sembly in the Slide to determine bale size. Movethe Magnet closer to the sensor for smaller balesand farther from the Sensor for larger bales.

Page 133: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 14 – Set-up & Assembly

Printed in U.S.A. 131 907520/CP0600

1 – Tractor Power Harness2 – Baler Control Module3 – Magnetic Control Stand4 – Implement Harness5 – Wire Tie6 – Tailgate Sensor Assembly7 – Clamp (13/16 Dia.)8 – Magnet Assembly9 – Nylon Washer

Fig. 130

10 – Magnet Nut11 – 3/8 Flat Washer12 – 3/8 x 1 Cap screw13 – Strap14 – 3/8 Nylon Insert Lock Nut15 – Slide16 – Plate17 – Shuttle Position/ Bale Size Sensor Assembly18 – 1/2 Nut

$�%+���%��

�2-$�'�2.'23

!

�"

"��

����

��

��

��

��

��

��

�!

��

,#%+��%������#�

������ �%� ���#�

������ ��

Page 134: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 14 – Set-up & Assembly

907520/CP0600 132 Printed in U.S.A.

Baler Tailgate Sensor Installation (SeeFig. 130)1. Remove the Nut and Lock Washer from the two

lower Gate Stop mounting Bolts on the left side ofthe Baler.

2. Mount the Tailgate Sensor Assembly as shown se-curing with the two lower Gate Stop mountingBolts. The Assembly has Weld Nuts for the Bolts.

1 – Wire Ties2 – Clamp, 1″ Dia. (25 mm)3 – 5/16″ Flat Washer4 – 5/16″ Lock Nut5 – Pause Sensor Cam

Fig. 131

6 – Upper Actuator Arm Assembly7 – Twine Tie Frame Assembly8 – 5/16 x 1 Cap Screw9 – End Wrap Pause Sensor Assembly

2� 3�%�,%0��)%�/4�$�%��

5�6���/%���%� ������6���0

�0+������/%������������

78 �%0#�+7���

9��#%+1��7���

5�6����0� ���

!

"

����

����

/�%�0��0����%

���������#���%0���

Page 135: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 14 – Set-up & Assembly

Printed in U.S.A. 133 907520/CP0600

Baler End Wrap Pause Sensor Installation(See Fig. 131)1. Remove Windguard to gain access to the Twine

Tie Assembly.

2. Install Pause Sensor Assembly on Twine TieFrame as shown securing with (2) 5/16 x 1″ CapScrews, (4) 5/16″ Flat Washers and (2) 5/16″ LockNuts.

NOTE: The Pause Sensor Cam MUST pass be-tween Magnet and Sensor without touching theMagnet or Sensor.

Baler Cable Installation (See Fig. 130)1. Route Implement Cable through Cable and Hose

Support, along Hydraulic Hoses, through theHitch Assembly and connect the Actuator leg(white & yellow wires) of the Cable into the Ac-tuator. Also connect the End Wrap Pause leg(brown & green wires) to the End Wrap PauseSensor.

2. Continue routing the Implement Cable throughthe left side of the Hitch Assembly, along theTwine Tube and to the remaining Sensors. TheConnector with the grey & green wires goes to theGate Latch Sensor and the Connector with theblue & green wires goes to the Shuttle Position/Bale Size Sensor.

3. Secure the Implement Harness with the Wire Ties& Clamps as shown.

4. Replace Windguard.

1 – To Tractor 12 volt D.C. Power System2 – Inline Fuse Holder3 – Connect to Mating Plug On Tractor Module

Fig. 132: Power Harness

4 – Power Harness5 – Connect to Mating Round Plug On Implement Harness

1

(+)

(–)

2

3

4

5

Page 136: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 14 – Set-up & Assembly

907520/CP0600 134 Printed in U.S.A.

1 – To Tractor Power Harness2 – To End of Wrap Pause Switch3 – To Twine Arm Actuator

Fig. 133: Implement Harness

4 – To Shuttle Position Switch5 – To Gate Latch Switch

3

21

4

5

AUTOMATIC BALE CONTROLSYSTEM (Figs. 134, 135 & 136)

Implement Module

The Implement Module is factory installed on the leftside of the Baler next to the TDC Cylinder. TheImplement Module is:

1. A memory storage unit

2. The controller for the Tractor Module

3. A fully pre-programmed computer

4. The component from which the Wiring Harnessextends

Tractor Module

The Tractor Module is part of a mounting and wiringpackage for the tractor. The Module and mounting andwiring package comprises:

1. A cooperating Microprocessor with the Imple-ment Module

2. A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) Indicator

3. Eight (8) Touch Keypads which are used singly orin pairs to perform specific functions

4. Magnetic base male Spade Mount and Bracket forplacement on tractor fender or other metal cabmember within convenient operator arm’s reach

NOTE: If NO convenient metal member exists,remove Spade Mount and secure with field-sup-plied standard hardware.

Remove protective cover from LCD Display by startingat one corner of the display and peel off plastic cover.

Power Harness1. Connect the Power Harness to an adequate power

source that is capable of supplying a minimum of17 Amps at 12 Volts. The red power lead is to beconnected to the (+) polarity of the power source,and the black power lead is to be connected to the(–) polarity (Ground)

2. Avoid using an intermediate harness or wiringmeans between the power source and the PowerHarness supplied with your Gehl Baler

3. An inline fuse holder is manufactured into the (+)positive lead of the Power Harness (See Item 2,

Page 137: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 14 – Set-up & Assembly

Printed in U.S.A. 135 907520/CP0600

Fig. 134). The holder should have a 20 Amp spadetype automotive fuse inside. For replacement usean equivalent 20 Amp fuse.

NOTE: Do NOT reverse wiring connections be-cause system will NOT respond.4. Route the Power Harness in such a way as to be

protected by its location, but not in interferencewith any other tractor controls or moving parts.

The rectangular connector with the four wires is tobe routed to the operator’s station and pluggedinto the back of the Tractor Module. The bracketwith the round 6-pin connector is to be routed tothe back of the tractor. The bracket should bemounted securely to the back of the tractor in alocation that will keep and hold the power cord ina safe operating position.

1 – To Tractor 12 volt D.C. Power System2 – Inline Fuse Holder3 – Connect to Mating Plug On Tractor Module

Fig. 134: Power Harness

4 – Power Harness5 – Connect to Mating Round Plug On Harness Extension

1

2

3

4

5

(+)

(–)

��(3:��4

��(3:;2�

��(3:��<

��(3:��<

��(3:�2�

��(3:�2�

��(3:��4

��(3:;2�

��(3:��<

��(3:�2�

1 – From Harness Extension 2 – To Baler

Fig. 135: Implement Harness

21

(

)

2

-

��(3:��4

��(3:;2�

��(3:��<

��(3:��<

��(3:�2�

��(3:�2�

(

��(3:��4

��(3:;2�

��(3:��<

��(3:�2�(

�:

7

Page 138: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 14 – Set-up & Assembly

907520/CP0600 136 Printed in U.S.A.

����������

�����������

������� ��

�������������������

�����������������

����������

����������

�����������

��

�����������

����������

��

��

��

��

��

��

�� ����

������������

���������

���������������������

�����������

��

���������

������������

��

�����������

����������

�����������

�����������

��������������

����������������������������

�������������������

�����������������

�����������������������

�����������������������

���������������!����

��������������������������

������������������������ �������������

�����������������!������

�����������������������

�������"�"����

�������"�"�����������

�����������#��

�����������#�

���������

���� ����

"����������������

"����������������������

��

��

�������"���

�����������

���������������������

��������"��������������

���� ���

�� ��

��

Fig. 136: Baler Harness

Page 139: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 14 – Set-up & Assembly

Printed in U.S.A. 137 907520/CP0600

Pin Identifications

Pin Wire Description

A1 Ground Black

A2 Twine Actuator (Yellow)

A3 Net Actuator

B1 Ground (Gate Latch - Black)

B2 Ground Gate Latch & Pinch Roll Return (Black)

B3 Bale Size Sensor +V (Red)

B4 Bale Size Sensor, Signal (Orange)

C1 Ground (Black)

C2 Left Twine Sensor (White)

D1 NOT Used

D2 Right Twine Sensor (Green)

D3 Pinch Roll Count (Violet)

D4 Shuttle Return (Pink)

G1 NOT Used

G2 Gate Latch Switch (Gray)

H1 Ground, Shuttle Return (Black)

H2 Serial Communication A. (Blue)

J1 Bale Size Sensor, Ground (Black)

J2 Left Twine Sensor Return (Black)

J3 End Wrap Pause (Brown)

J4 Serial Communication B. (Yellow)

K1 +12 Volts D.C. (Red)

K2 Twine Actuator (Red)

K3 Net Actuator (Red)

Plug Identifications

Pin Wire Description

B3 Bale Size Sensor +V (Red)

B4 Bale Size Sensor, Signal (Orange)

J1 Bale Size Sensor, Ground (Black)

K1 +12 Volts D.C. (Red)

A1 Ground Black

C2 Left Twine Sensor (White)

D2 Right Twine Sensor (Green)

J2 Left Twine Sensor Return (Black)

G2 Gate Latch Switch (Gray)

B1 Ground (Gate Latch - Black)

J3 End Wrap Pause (Brown)

C1 Ground (Black)

D3 Pinch Roll Count (Violet)

B2 Ground Gate Latch & Pinch Roll Return (Black)

H2 Serial Communication A. (Blue)

J4 Serial Communication B. (Yellow)

K2 Twine Actuator (Red)

A2 Twine Actuator (Yellow)

K3 Net Actuator (Red)

A3 Net Actuator

D4 Shuttle Return (Pink)

H1 Ground, Shuttle Return (Black)

Page 140: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 138 Printed in U.S.A.

CHAPTER 15OPTIONAL FEATURES & ACCESSORIES

GENERAL INFORMATIONThe following Optional Features & Accessories areavailable for installation on a Baler to increase itscapabilities. Set-up and assembly information for allKits, except the Twine Tie Mechanisms, are provided inseparate instructions packaged with each Kit of parts.

1000 RPM CONVERSION KITThe 1000 RPM Conversion Kit (806698) will converta standard 540 RPM RB1475 or RB1875 to 1000 RPMoperation. The Kit includes a 1000 RPM Transmission,a tractor to implement PTO, 8 Shear Bolts, 2 Decals andan Instruction Sheet.

BELT LACING KITThe Belt Lacing Kit (802700) contains a 6″ (152.5 mm)wide Clipper Vice Lacer, (6) #4-1/2 Clipper Hook Cardsand a 72″ (1829 mm) long piece of Nylon-coatedStainless Steel Cable. The Kit is required when it isnecessary to repair a Baler Bale Forming Belt. Refer todetails in the Service chapter of this manual for using theKit.

BELT RE-LACING KITThe Belt Re-lacing Kit (073390) contains the samecomponents as the Belt Lacing Kit (802700) above withthe exception of the Clipper Vice Lacer. This Kit isavailable to replace the supplies furnished with theabove Kit.

BELT LACING CABLEThe Belt Lacing Cable (094104) is a 7″ (178 mm) longpiece of Nylon-coated Stainless Steel Cable used forrethreading a Belt splice. Refer to the instructions in theService chapter of this manual for using this Cable.

A 6′ (1.83 m) roll of Lacing Cable is also available byordering part number 078112. Instructions are included.

CROWDER WHEELS KITThe Crowder Wheels Kit (806492) is available forexpanding the Pickup width of either model Baler toenable taking in a wider swath of material. The Kit

contains (2) Crowder Wheels, Mounts and attachinghardware. Installation, operation and adjustment detailsare provided with the Kit of parts.

PACKING ROLLER LAGGING KIT(Fig. 137)The Packing Roller Lagging Kit (068633) is availableto improve feeding into the Baler in certain cropconditions. The Kit contains (2) Strips of Lagging(Belting), (36) Rivets and (4) Cover Strips. Installationdetails are provided with the package of parts.

1 – Lagging Strips2 – Rivets (2 of 36)3 – Cover Strips (2 of 4)

Fig. 137: Packing Roller Lagging Kit (Installed)

PICKUP HYDRAULIC LIFT KITThe Pickup Hydraulic Lift Kit (806946) is available forremote height control of the Crop Pickup from thetractor. The Kit contains a Hydraulic Cylinder, hydrau-lic connections and mounting hardware. Installationdetails are provided with the Kit.

SHEAR BOLTSOn 540 RPM model Balers, replacement Grade L9, 1/4x 1-1/2″ Shear Bolts are available in packaged quanti-ties of (8) per package by ordering part number 095141.

On 1000 RPM model Balers, replacement Grade 5, 1/4x 1-1/2″ Shear Bolts are available in packaged quanti-ties of (8) per package by ordering part number 900084.

Page 141: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 15 – Optional Features & Accessories

Printed in U.S.A. 139 907520/CP0600

CHEVRONED BELT DUTCHMAN KITThe Dutchman Kit (126230) contains (1) 36″ long, 6″wide section of Chevron Belt, already laced and readyfor splicing. Installation details are provided with theKit.

NET STRIPPER KITThe Net Stripper Kit (127038 - 1475 & 127039 - 1875)prevents the netting from following the belts up thebackside of the Baler.

CHAIN OILER KITThe Chain Oiler Kit (806491) provides automatic oilingof all Drive Chains as the Baler is used. Installationdetails are provided with the Kit.

SAFETY CHAIN (Fig. 138)The recommended Safety Chain for use with theseBalers can be obtained in Kit 803320.

NOTE: If the Baler is to be transported on apublic highway, a Safety Chain Kit should be ob-tained and installed following the details in theTransporting chapter.

Fig. 138: Safety Chain (Installed)

CONNECTOR KIT 119923This Connector Kit repairs the male and female ends ofthe Connectors (2 wires) that join the ends of the BalerHarness with the Left and Right Twine Feed Sensors,End Wrap Pause Sensor, Pinch Roll Count Sensor (NetWrap models only) and the Shuttle Return & Full SizeBale Sensor on the Automatic Bale Control models. TheKit also repairs the Connectors for the End Wrap PauseSensor, Gate Latch Sensor & Full Size Bale Sensor onthe Automatic Twine Wrap models. Installation detailsare provided with the Kit.

CONNECTOR KIT 119924This Connector Kit repairs the male and female ends ofthe Connectors (3 wires) that join the ends of the BalerHarness with the Bale Size Sensor. Installation detailsare provided with the Kit.

CONNECTOR KIT 119925This Connector Kit repairs the male and female ends ofthe Connector (2 wires, 18 AWG blue and yellow) thatjoins the ends of the Baler Harness with the ImplementHarness. Installation details are provided with the Kit.

CONNECTOR KIT 119926This Kit repairs the 6 hole Connector to the Cab Moduleof the Auto–Electric Tie System in the tractor PowerHarness. Installation details are provided with the Kit.

CONNECTOR KIT 119927This Connector Kit repairs the male and female ends ofthe Connector (2 wires, 10 AWG red and black) thatjoins the ends of the Baler Harness with the ImplementHarness. Installation details are provided with the Kit.

CONNECTOR KIT 119928This Kit repairs the Fuse Holder in the tractor PowerHarness on both Automatic Bale Control and ManualTwine Wrap models. Installation details are providedwith the Kit.

CONNECTOR KIT 119929This Connector Kit repairs the end of the Baler Harness(30 wire Connector) that plugs into the ImplementModule. Installation details are provided with the Kit.

Page 142: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 15 – Optional Features & Accessories

907520/CP0600 140 Printed in U.S.A.

CONTACT KIT 141191This Kit repairs the Contacts in the Plugs that join thetractor Power Harness to the Implement Harness onboth Automatic Bale Control and Manual Twine Wrapmodels. The Kit also repairs the Contacts in the Plugsthat join the tractor Power Harness to the Baler Controlon the Manual Twine Wrap models. Installation detailsare provided with the Kit.

CONNECTOR KIT 141192This Kit repairs the Plug (tractor half of ConnectorONLY) that joins the tractor Power Harness to theImplement Harness on both Automatic Bale Controland Manual Twine Wrap models. The Kit also repairsthe Plug in the Baler Control that plugs into the tractorPower Harness on Manual Twine Wrap models. Instal-lation details are provided with the Kit.

CONNECTOR KIT 141193This Kit repairs the Plug (Baler half of ConnectorONLY) that joins Implement Harness to the tractor

Power Harness on both Automatic Bale Control andManual Twine Wrap models. The Kit also repairs thePlug in the tractor Power Harness that plugs into theBaler Control on Manual Twine Wrap models. Installa-tion details are provided with the Kit.

TWINE SENSOR JUMPERHARNESS 141460(AUTOMATIC BALE CONTOL ONLY)

This Harness provides the necessary electrical connec-tion to enable the Baler to be operated using just onestring of twine on the Automatic Bale Control models.

2 MAGNET TWINE WHEEL 141532(AUTOMATIC BALE CONTROLONLY)

The 2 magnet Twine Wheel will speed up the twinetieing cycle. A Wheel MUST be ordered for each sideof the Baler.

Page 143: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 141 907520/CP0600

CHAPTER 16DECAL LOCATIONS

GENERAL INFORMATIONDecal Locations information is provided to assist in theproper selection and application of new decals, in theevent the original decal(s) become(s) damaged or themachine is repainted. Refer to the listing for theillustration reference number, part number, descriptionand quantity of each decal provided in the Kit. Referto the appropriate illustration(s) for replacementlocation(s).

NOTE: Refer to the SAFETY Chapter of the Op-erator’s Manual for the specific information pro-vided on all of the various Safety Decals furnishedin the Decal Kit(s).

To insure proper selection for correct replacementdecal(s), compare all of the various close-up locationphotographs to your machine BEFORE starting torefinish the unit. Then, circle each pictured decal(applicable to your machine) while checking off its partnumber in the listing. After you have verified all thedecals needed for replacement, set aside unneededdecals for disposal.

NEW DECAL APPLICATIONSurfaces MUST be free from dirt, dust, grease and other

foreign material before applying the new decal. Toapply a solid-formed decal, remove the smaller portionof the decal backing paper and apply this part of theexposed adhesive backing to the clean surface whilemaintaining proper position and alignment. Slowly peeloff the other portion of the backing paper while applyinghand pressure to smooth out the decal surface.

CAUTIONALWAYS observe safety rules shown on de-cals. If decals become damaged, or if the unitis repainted, replace the decals. If repainting,BE SURE that ALL decals from the kit(s) whichapply to your machine are affixed to your unit.

PAINT NOTICEUse this list to order paint for refinishing:906315 One Gal. AG Red902872 One Qt. Light Grey906316 6 (12 oz. Spray Cans) AG Red902874 6 (12 oz. Spray Cans) Light Grey

Page 144: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 16 – Decal Locations

907520/CP0600 142 Printed in U.S.A.

For a complete Decal Set, order Part Number 119614 forthe RB1475 model Baler or 119615 for the RB1875model Baler. The following Decals (as required) areincluded in the Sets:Ref. PartNo. No. Description & Quantity1 060147 Operating Instructions2 060148 General Operating Instructions3 060151 Shuttle Lock Position (2 Places)4 060510 Jack Storage Position5 060511 Jack Lifting Position6 061832 Belt Tracking Adjustment (2 Places)7 067131 Patent8 067493 Red Reflector Strip (2 Places)9 091444 DANGER - Rotating Drive Line

10 093020 Lubrication Symbol (16 Places)11 093366 IMPORTANT - Store Manual Here12 093367 WARNING - Owner’s Responsibility

& Read Manual13 093373 WARNING - General Safety14 093457 WARNING - Keep Door Closed (3 Places)15 093458 WARNING - Rotating Wrench16 093459 WARNING - Reservoir Contamination17 093461 DANGER - Belt Entanglement18 093462 DANGER - No Manual Feed (2 Places)19 093466 WARNING - 540 RPM Operation ONLY

20 093653 WARNING - Rotating Drive Line21 094914 GEHL 5 x 23-1/2″ (Front)22 094962 Colorbar 13-1/2 (1 on Each Side)23 119562** Bale Size Indicator (1875 – 0-3)

119561** Bale Size Indicator (1875 – 4-6)094977** Bale Size Indicator (1475)*

24 112981 Oil Level Indicator25 113340 Reservoir Maintenance26 119446 1475

119447 1875*27 119448 TDC (1 on Each Side)28 119449 High Moisture (Left Side)(1475 only)

119450 High Moisture (Right Side)(1475 only)*29 141493 Tailgate Lock

(After SN24715–1475 & SN17900-1875)29 119553 Tailgate Lock

(Before SN24716–1475 & SN17901-1875)

30 119554 DANGER - Moving Tailgate (2 Places)31 119596 DANGER - Baler Entanglement (2 Places)32 122617 GEHL (1 on Each Side)33 143007 DANGER - PTO Shield (under Shield)

* Not Shown** Automatic & Manual Twine Wrap Models Only

NOTE: Order Part Number 126757 for 10 ft rollof replacement Striping

Page 145: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 16 – Decal Locations

Printed in U.S.A. 143 907520/CP0600

15

5

19

3

14

30

22

26

14

1318

20

4

3131

9

1732

27

1010

10

10

Front Master

21

23

28

10

33

Page 146: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 16 – Decal Locations

907520/CP0600 144 Printed in U.S.A.

NOTE: This following is a duplicated listing ofthe Decals from a previous page. It is provided foryour convenience when selecting Decals from thesecond page of photographs.

For a complete Decal Set, order Part Number 119614 forthe RB1475 model Baler or 119615 for the RB1875model Baler. The following Decals (as required) areincluded in the Sets:

Ref. PartNo. No. Description & Quantity1 060147 Operating Instructions2 060148 General Operating Instructions3 060151 Shuttle Lock Position (2 Places)4 060510 Jack Storage Position5 060511 Jack Lifting Position6 061832 Belt Tracking Adjustment (2 Places)7 067131 Patent8 067493 Red Reflector Strip (2 Places)9 091444 DANGER - Rotating Drive Line

10 093020 Lubrication Symbol (16 Places)11 093366 IMPORTANT - Store Manual Here12 093367 WARNING - Owner’s Responsibility

& Read Manual13 093373 WARNING - General Safety14 093457 WARNING - Keep Door Closed (3 Places)15 093458 WARNING - Rotating Wrench16 093459 WARNING - Reservoir Contamination

17 093461 DANGER - Belt Entanglement18 093462 DANGER - No Manual Feed (2 Places)19 093466 WARNING - 540 RPM Operation ONLY20 093653 WARNING - Rotating Drive Line21 094914 GEHL 5 x 23-1/2″ (Front)22 094962 Colorbar 13-1/2 (1 on Each Side)23 119562** Bale Size Indicator (1875 – 0-3)

119561** Bale Size Indicator (1875 – 4-6)094977** Bale Size Indicator (1475)*

24 112981 Oil Level Indicator25 113340 Reservoir Maintenance26 119446 1475

119447 1875*27 119448 TDC (1 on Each Side)28 119449 High Moisture (Left Side)(1475 only)

119450 High Moisture (Right Side)(1475 only)*29 141493 Tailgate Lock

(After SN24715–1475 & SN17900-1875)119553 Tailgate Lock

(Before SN24716–1475 & SN17901-1875)

30 119554 DANGER - Moving Tailgate (2 Places)31 119596 DANGER - Baler Entanglement (2 Places)32 122617 GEHL (1 on Each Side)33 143007 DANGER - PTO Shield (under Shield)

* Not Shown** Automatic & Manual Twine Wrap Models Only

NOTE: Order Part Number 126757 for 10 ft rollof replacement Striping

Page 147: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 16 – Decal Locations

Printed in U.S.A. 145 907520/CP0600

6

Rear Master

3

7

32

27

10

11 1 2

12

30

14

16

25

2422

26

10

10

10

29 88

Page 148: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 16 – Decal Locations

907520/CP0600 146 Printed in U.S.A.

QUICK WRAP DECALSIndividual Decal Sets for the QW1400 and QW1800Quick Wraps are NOT available. Order Quick Wrapdecals by individual part numbers.

Ref. PartNo. No. Description & Quantity

1. 047272 Decal – SMV2. 093457 WARNING – Moving Components

(2 Places)3. 124982 WARNING – Pinch Point4. 113151 Decal – Net Instructions

����

���� ����

�������� ������

���������������

���� ����

���� ����

���������

�������������������

��

Page 149: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 147 907520/CP0600

CHAPTER 17MAINTENANCE LOG

NOTE: Under extreme operating conditions more frequent service than the recommended intervals maybe required. You must decide if your actual operation requires more frequent service based on your use.

SERVICE EVERY 10 HOURS

COMPONENT and SERVICE REQUIRED PROCEDURE and/or CHAPTER TOPICREFERENCE (Check Page No. in Index)

Inspect Upper Belts. Check Lacing and Pins.

Check Roller Chain Tension. See Chain Idlers topic in Adjustments chapter.

Lubricate Chains and appropriate grease fittings. Refer to Lubrication chapter for Grease Fittinglocations and intervals.

TDC Reservoir air pressure & fluid level. Refer to Density Control system topic inService chapter.

Date After Service is Completed

Page 150: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 17 – Maintenance Log

907520/CP0600 148 Printed in U.S.A.

SERVICE EVERY 50 HOURS

Check Tire Pressure and Wheel Nut Torque. Inflate Tires to 40 PSIG (280 kPa) and torqueWheel Lugs to 90 ft-lb (124.5Nm).

Check Universal Drive Guards. Lubricate and test that Drive Shaft rotates freelyinside Guard.

Inspect Twine Knife. Check sharpness – See Twine Knife topic inService chapter.

Readjust Scraper position. Set up to Roller – See Scraper topic inAdjustments chapter.

Inspect Pickup Overfill Clutch. See Overfill Clutch topic in Adjustments chapter.

Inspect all Roller Bearings. Check for Seal failure & overheating.

Date After Service is Completed

SERVICE EVERY 100 HOURS

COMPONENT and SERVICE REQUIRED PROCEDURE and/or CHAPTER TOPICREFERENCE (Check Page No. in Index)

Inspect Roller Chains and Drive Sprockets. Replace if worn more than 3% elongation.

Inspect Pickup Drive Belt. Replace if Belt NO longer drives Pickup.

Inspect Cams and Cam Bearings. See Pickup topic in Service chapter.

Check Packing Roller to 8″Lower Roller clearance.

Readjust to 1/4″ (6 mm) clearance – see PackingRoller Clearance topic in Adjustments chapter.

Check quality and level of Transmission lubrication. Replace or replenish – see Lubrication chapter.

Date After Service is Completed

Page 151: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Chapter 17 – Maintenance Log

Printed in U.S.A. 149 907520/CP0600

SERVICE EVERY 200 HOURS (OR END OF SEASON)

Inspect Universal Drive Joints. Refer if worn (loud and vibrating).

Inspect Universal Joint Seals. Replace if Seals worn or damaged.

Lubricate appropriate grease fittingsand repack Wheel Bearings.

Refer to Lubrication chapter.

Date After Service is Completed

Page 152: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 150 Printed in U.S.A.

Index�

������������ � �����������������������������

����������������������������������� ������ !

�����������������������������"�#��$�%���&�$��'��������(��)�������������

�������*���������*��������'�+�������,����������-��������*�$�����%"'.../0' ��1

�%0 �../02 �� 0��$�����%"'..0/0' ��1

�%0 �.0/02 �� .+����3���'0+�����4����*��+5���������00�+��������%����������*�' 6��������'.6����������� �7��*��������*���3�����8�������(�9�3���'"8�����9�3���'!84����:����9�3���''8����:%��9�3���'"

3����$����������$�������'"3����$�������������;7����<�'!3����$�������������;&�$�����<

'!4��-���=������*�������'24�����4����=��������''4��������� �����

����>����:7�?����>����� '�4�������������

+5�����:@���������''%����������*������������

������'�=�������*����'�=������*��������'0=��������'.,�����*�A��'0,��*����8��&+��)B+9�'2,��*��������������7������'2�������������*��������'2���/���0!'

�-������@����������-��������*�$�����%"�.../0' ��1

�%0 �../02 �� "��$�����%"�..0/0' ��1

�%0 �.0/02 �� !�����$��������'����*���������-��������*���

����������������������������������1���$����+C�������"�+�������,����������-��������*

�$�����%"'.../0' ��1�%0 �../02 ���2

6��������!�=��������!����/���0!.�����$�������������*���������-��������*��2

�5���D��*-���������*��

������������;4���������������������=��<��'

�����7������!0

�����7���-��*��@������������*�

�����6��������!0

�����6����*��������������*��'

�����D����*�1������*��!!

�����@�����-������;���� �����4������=��<������������0"2

�����@����������������0"2

�������(��)����������������>����2"

�������(��E������)��������4����1����������������������4������!'

��������������������*��

�����*��;D�*-�4��������D��<�!'

�����F������������*��2

���������>����22

�-���)�������������*��2

�-�� ������ ��

������G����4�������=���*��'

������G����&���-�,�������������*��!

������G����&���-�������������*��'

��������)����$�������?�@�*-������"�

��������)����$�������?�&�$������"2

�������� )����$����������������������������4������'

��������1���$����+C�������".�" ����������������������������

"����������������������������"�4����������������������"�

7����������������0'0

7�����&��������0'0�0'!���� ������0'�

7���H���6�����

+�����4����*���5��������+0�00�+"�00�+!�00 +��00�+��0"0+ �0""+2�0"!+��0"'+0.�0"�

Page 153: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

Printed in U.S.A. 151 907520/CP0600

Index (Cont.)�

6����:����H�5������H�����".

6����+5��*���-���""

6����F����������H���".

F������������&�� ����E��>��$�����%"' 0�/0' ��1

�%0 �../02 ��"0��$�����%"' 0�/0' ��1

�%0 �.0/02 ��""

F����+��@�������������*���

F����D�������������>����2!

F����&���-�&�$��@�����������*��2

F�����������������*���

F������6����*�&�������� 2�2.

F�����*�

F������7�����1��-������"!6���������F�����"!D�*���F�����7�����"!,�� ���E?�����F�����"'@���>�H���������-������"!

D���-������������

D���-��� �"'

D�������������������2

)����������"

&�H�������� �20���� ������ 2

4�������� 0' �0'�

�������������� �����������������0.

4���������������!�

4�����������������������������1���$����+C�������"����/���0"�

4�����1��������%�I�,������"

=���*�

=��������"2�������������������������������

'.���������������������������!�4���������������!����� �������0

=�����������*����������!!

=�������6��������1������������0!2�0'.

0...�@,4���>������3���0!2�����&���*�3���0!2�����@�?����*�3���0!2�-���=�����3���0!���������3���0'.��������3���00��"!�0!���������3���00��"'�0!���������3���00��"��0!���������3���00��"��0!���������3���00��" �0!���������3���00��"2�0!���������3���00��"��0!��������3���0'00�0�0'.���������-����3���0!2%������������3���0!�,�� �*�@������&�**�*�3���0!2,�� ���D���������&�$��3���0!2��$�����-���0!��-����������0!2�����������G������D������0'.A����������7���-���3���0!�A����������&���*���H���0!2

=>��$���������-��������*��0

=>��$����,���������!'

=>�����*������-������ ���������*���

,�� �*�@����������������������*���

,����%������0'0

,�� ���������*��.���>����2!���������*�,�������0."

,�� ���7��>���������*��.

,�� ���6������������*��������*��.

,������*���������H����������

,������*�$���6�����=����������0..

,�=����������

���� ���������������� !7�����&��������0'�F������)$���������.&�H�������� 2=���������0@����)�����������.���>�����'����H���-����*�0"�A���**�*��"������*��-��������"

@����F���������F������������*���

@�$��������0.0

@�>����*�����-�"'

Page 154: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 152 Printed in U.S.A.

Index (Cont.)�

������0.�0����� ������0�

��$�����-���"��0.0

���������������*��0

������������*�@����������2"

���>����2"������� �������'

���?���1������H���0"2�0! ����������������������������

0!'��������������������������

0!.4����������������������0"�

�-�����������'

�-������&�� ��""

�-�������������������*��"

�4E�+�H����4����*�&�������0.0

�����$��������!�����������������������������'����������������������������

�C����*�������-�������"

�����*��0.!

�����-���������+5���:@�������! �!2����:4����������!

4��������������! �!2,�����=:=$$�!

��H���=$��������0

�7��D����������������&�H��������

�7��,��������@����$�E��>��"�

�7��@����>��������,��������2'

�7��@����>����7����*�1@������*�2�

�7��@����>����6�����&�>���2�

�7��������6������!.���>����2'

�7��E��>�������4��-�����������*���

���������*�,�=�7��>��"

�����)$������,���������!

���C����-����)�����6������>��

���� �*�1����*�����������*��'

��������,�����@�C���������!

��������@�C�����������

�����������&�H��������

���������&�*-��*�"��0.0

���������*�0.0�0."

����H���-����*�0.'�0" ����������������������������

00!��������������������������

000���� ������0"�

�����3�$���-�����*�22

�����,���������������*��!

�����@����*���

������������*�-��������*��!

�����������;4�����������=��<��������*��!

A���**�*����� �������"

A���**�*���������

��������)�����6������>��

�-�����1����������>�����!

���*������������*��0

����*�7��*�����D������������������������0!.����������������������������

0!�

Page 155: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONSNOTE: Use these torque values when tightening GEHL hardware (excluding: Locknuts and Self–tap-ping, Thread Forming and Sheet Metal Screws) unless specified otherwise.

All torque values are in Lb-Ft except those marked with an * which are Lb-In(For metric torque value Nm, multiply Lb-Ft value by 1.355 or Lb-In value by 0.113)

UnifiedNational Thread

Grade 2 Grade 5 Grade 8UnifiedNational Thread Dry Lubed Dry Lubed Dry Lubed

8-32 19* 14* 30* 22* 41* 31*8-328-36

19*20*

14*15*

30*31*

22*23*

41*43*

31* 32*

10-24 27* 21* 43* 32* 60* 45*10-2410-32

27*31*

21*23*

43*49*

32*36*

60*68*

45* 51*

1/4-20 66* 50* 9 75* 12 91/4-201/4-28

66*76*

50*56*

910

75*86*

1214

9 10

5/16-18 11 9 17 13 25 185/16-185/16-24

1112 9 17

191314 25 18

20

3/8-16 20 15 30 23 45 353/8-163/8-24

2023

1517

3035

2325

4550 35

7/16-14 32 24 50 35 70 557/16-147/16-20

3236

2427

5055

3540

7080

55 60

1/2-13 50 35 75 55 110 801/2-131/2-20

5055

3540

7590

5565

110120

80 90

9/16-12 70 55 110 80 150 1109/16-129/16-18

7080

5560

110120

8090

150170

110 130

5/8-11 100 75 150 110 220 1705/8-115/8-18

100110

7585

150180

110130

220240

170 180

3/4-10 175 130 260 200 380 2803/4-103/4-16

175200

130150

260300

200220

380420

280 320

7/8-9 170 125 430 320 600 4607/8-97/8-14

170180

125140

430470

320360

600660

460 500

1-8 250 190 640 480 900 6801-81-14

250270

190210

640710

480530

9001000

680 740

MetricCourse Thread

Grade 8.8 8.8 Grade 10.9 10.9 Grade 12.9 12.9MetricCourse Thread Dry Lubed Dry Lubed Dry Lubed

M6-1 8 6 11 8 13.5 10

M8-1.25 19 14 27 20 32.5 24

M10-1.5 37.5 28 53 39 64 47

M12-1.75 65 48 91.5 67.5 111.5 82

M14-2 103.5 76.5 145.5 108 176.5 131

M16-2 158.5 117.5 223.5 165.5 271 200

Page 156: Form No. 1475/1875€¦ · behind the Left Shield Door. “Right’’ and “Left’’ are determined from a position standing at the rear of the unit facing the direction of travel.

907520/CP0600 2000 GEHL Company, All rights reserved. Printed in U.S.A.

WARNINGTHIS OPERATOR’S MANUAL IS

PROVIDED FOR OPERATOR USE

DO NOT REMOVEFROM THIS MACHINE

THANK YOUDO NOT START, OPERATE OR WORK ON THIS MACHINE UNTILYOU HAVE CAREFULLY READ AND THOROUGHLYUNDERSTAND THE CONTENTS OF THE OPERATOR’S MANUAL.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW SAFETY, OPERATING ANDMAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS COULD RESULT IN SERIOUSINJURY TO THE OPERATOR OR BYSTANDERS, POOROPERATION, AND COSTLY BREAKDOWN.

IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS ON PROPER OPERATION,ADJUSTMENT OR MAINTENANCE OF THIS MACHINE,CONTACT YOUR DEALER OR THE SERVICE DEPARTMENT OFGEHL COMPANY BEFORE STARTING OR CONTINUINGOPERATION.

Gehl Company 143 Water Street, P.O. Box 179, West Bend, WI 53095-0179, U.S.A.